Sie sind auf Seite 1von 210

WORKSHOP MANUAL

2008MY TF SERIES

TRANSMISSION
4L60E MODEL

SECTION 7

Isuzu Motors Limited

Service Marketing Department


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–1

7C1
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –
General Information
ATTENTION
Before performing any service operation or other procedure described in this Section, refer to Warnings,
Cautions and Notes for correct workshop practices with regard to safety and/or property damage.

1 Section Descriptions..............................................................................................................................3
1.1 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES.................................................................................................................... 3
Definition of WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE Statements................................................................................. 3
WARNING Defined............................................................................................................................................. 3
CAUTION Defined.............................................................................................................................................. 3
NOTE Defined .................................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 7C1 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information ........................................................................... 4
Recommendations................................................................................................................................................. 4
Oil Cooler Pipes ..................................................................................................................................................... 4
Clean and Inspect .................................................................................................................................................. 5
1.3 7C2 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis ........................................................................... 5
1.4 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis ............................................... 5
1.5 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.......................................................................... 5

2 General information ...............................................................................................................................6


2.1 Transmission Control Module – HFV6 ................................................................................................................. 6
2.2 Transmission Identification .................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 Economy, Power and Cruise Modes .................................................................................................................... 7
Economy Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 7
Power Mode............................................................................................................................................................ 7
Cruise Mode ........................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.4 System Protection Devices ................................................................................................................................... 8
2.5 Self Diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................................ 8
2.6 TCM Sensors and Actuators ................................................................................................................................. 8

3 Transmission Control Module Operation Overview ...........................................................................9


3.1 Transmission Control Module .............................................................................................................................. 9
Component Location ............................................................................................................................................. 9
Transmission Control Module Data Transfer ...................................................................................................... 9
Transmission Control Module Operation........................................................................................................... 10
3.2 TCM Wiring Diagrams.......................................................................................................................................... 10

4 Transmission Definitions and Abbreviations....................................................................................11


4.1 Throttle Position Related Definitions ................................................................................................................. 11
4.2 Noise Condition Related Definitions .................................................................................................................. 11
4.3 General Definitions .............................................................................................................................................. 11
4.4 Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................................................... 14

5 Service Notes........................................................................................................................................15
Fasteners .............................................................................................................................................................. 15
General Workshop Practice ................................................................................................................................ 15

6 Torque Specifications ..........................................................................................................................16

7 Transmission Specifications...............................................................................................................17
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–2

7.1 General.................................................................................................................................................................. 17

8 Special Tools ........................................................................................................................................20


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–3

1 Section Descriptions
Service information for the Hydra-matic 4L60E Automatic transmission has been divided into five Sections to assist the
technician to quickly locate the correct service, maintenance and diagnostic information.
The following provides a brief outline of each of the Sections.
• 7C1 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information
• 7C2 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis
• 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis
• 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing
The following provides a brief outline of each of the Sections.

1.1 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES


This Section contains various WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTE statements that you must observe carefully to reduce
the risk of death or injury during service, repair procedures or vehicle operation. Incorrect service or repair procedures
may damage the vehicle or cause operational faults. WARNINGS, CAUTION and NOTE statements are not exhaustive.
GM HOLDEN LTD can not possibly warn of all the potentially hazardous consequences of failure to follow these
instructions.

Definition of WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE Statements


Diagnosis and repair procedures in this Section contain both general and specific WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE
statements. GM HOLDEN LTD is dedicated to the presentation of service information that helps the technician to
diagnose and repair the systems necessary for proper operation of the vehicle. Certain procedures may present a hazard
to the technician if they are not followed in the recommended manner. WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE statements are
designed to help prevent these hazards from occurring, but not all hazards can be foreseen.

WARNING Defined
A WARNING statement immediately precedes an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not correctly
followed, could result in death or injury. A WARNING statement alerts you to take necessary action or not to take a
prohibited action. If a WARNING statement is ignored, the following consequences may occur:
• Death or injury to the technician or other personnel working on the vehicle,
• Death or injury to other people in or near the workplace area, and / or
• Death or injury to the driver / or passenger(s) of the vehicle or other people, if the vehicle has been improperly
repaired.

CAUTION Defined
A CAUTION statement immediately precedes an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not correctly
followed, could result in damage to or destruction of equipment, or corruption of data. If a CAUTION statement is ignored,
the following consequences may occur:
• Damage to the vehicle,
• Unnecessary vehicle repairs or component replacement,
• Faulty operation or performance of any system or component being repaired,
• Damage to any system or components which depend on the proper operation of the system or component being
repaired,
• Faulty operation or performance of any systems or components which depend on the proper operation or
performance of the system or component under repair,
• Damage to fasteners, basic tools or special tools and / or
• Leakage of coolant, lubricant or other vital fluids.

NOTE Defined
A NOTE statement immediately precedes or follows an operating procedure, maintenance practice or condition that
requires highlighting. A NOTE statement also emphasises necessary characteristics of a diagnostic or repair procedure.
A NOTE statement is designed to:
• Clarify a procedure,
• Present additional information for accomplishing a procedure,
• Give insight into the reasons for performing a procedure in the recommended manner, and / or
• Present information that gives the technician the benefit of past experience in accomplishing a procedure with
greater ease.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–4

1.2 7C1 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


General Information
This section provides general information about the automatic transmission, including:
• A glossary of terms,
• Transmission identification information,
• Electrical overview of the Transmission Control Module (TCM),
• Some notes that address safe workshop practices,
• Service notes relating to fasteners and consumable items used at various stages throughout this section,
• Special tools required to work on the transmission,
• Fastener torque specifications, and
• Transmission specifications.
For all information relating to the mechanical construction and function of the 4L60E automatic transmission, refer to the
General Motors Powertrain Group Electronically Controlled Automatic Transmission Technician’s Guide.
This guide includes such information as:
• Transmission Cutaway Views,
• Principles of Operation,
• Power Flow,
• Complete Hydraulic Circuits,
• Bushing and Bearing Locations,
• Seal Locations and
• Illustrated Parts List.

NOTE
Specifications quoted in this General Motors
Powertrain Group Electronically Controlled
Automatic Transmission Technician Guide may
not be for the vehicle you are working on. For
correct specifications refer to
7 Transmission Specifications.

Recommendations
When servicing the transmission, all parts should be cleaned and inspected. Individual units should be reassembled
before disassembly of other units to avoid confusion and interchanging of parts.
a Thoroughly clean the transmission exterior before removal of any component.
b Disassembly and reassembly must be made on a clean work bench. Cleanliness is of the utmost importance, the
bench tools and parts must be kept clean at all times.
c Before installing screws and other fasteners into aluminium parts, dip screw threads into transmission fluid to
prevent galling aluminium threads and to prevent screws from seizing.
d To prevent thread stripping, always use a torque wrench when installing screws or nuts.
e If threads in aluminium parts are stripped or damaged, the parts can be made serviceable by the use of
commercially available thread inserts.
f Protective tools must be used when assembling seals to prevent damage. The slightest flaw in the sealing surface
of the seal can cause an oil leak.
g Aluminium castings and valve parts are very susceptible to nicks, burrs, etc. and should be handled with care.
h Expand Internal snap rings and compress external snap rings if they are to be re-used to ensure proper seating
when reinstalled.
i Do not re-use removed O-rings, gaskets and oil seals.
j Teflon oil seal rings should not be removed unless damaged.
k During assembly of each unit, all internal moving parts must be lubricated with transmission fluid.

Oil Cooler Pipes


Should any transmission fluid cooling pipe suffer accidental damage, a genuine replacement pipe must be fitted. Refer to
the current release of PartFinder™ to determine the correct part number for the particular engine and pipe involved.
Reworking of damaged pipes or hand made replacements are not permitted.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–5

Clean and Inspect

Do not use solvents on neoprene seals,


composition faced clutch plates or thrust
washers as damage to parts may occur.

After complete disassembly of a component, wash all metal parts in a clean solvent and dry with compressed air. Blow
oil passages out and check to make sure they are not obstructed, small passages should be checked with tag wire. All
parts should be inspected to determine if replacement is required.
Pay particular attention to the following:
• Inspect linkage and pivot points for excessive wear.
• Bearing and thrust surfaces of all parts should be checked for excessive wear and scoring.
• Check for broken seal rings, damaged ring lands and damaged threads.
• Inspect seals for damage.
• Mating surfaces of castings should be checked for burrs. Irregularities may be removed by lapping the surface with
emery paper laid on a flat surface, such as a piece of plate glass.
• Castings should be checked for cracks and porosity.

1.3 7C2 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


Electrical Diagnosis
For transmissions fitted to V6 engines, the electrical diagnosis is in this Section. A new electrical circuit and control
module has been introduced for automatic transmissions fitted to the V6 engines.

1.4 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis
Information contained in 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis will assist in the
diagnosis of the mechanical and hydraulic components in the 4L60E automatic transmission, while the transmission
remains installed on the vehicle.
Examples of the type of diagnostic information contained within this section are:
• transmission functional test,
• line pressure information,
• transmission fluid diagnosis,
• symptom diagnosis and
• shift speed charts.

1.5 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing
Information in 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing covers transmission fluid level checking, as
well as specific information for servicing some components while the transmission remains installed on the vehicle. This
Section also covers the transmission removal and reinstallation to the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–6

2 General information
The hydra-matic 4L60E automatic transmission is fitted to vehicles with HFV6 engine. The mechanical and internal
electrical operation of the transmission unit is controlled by the transmission control module (TCM) for HFV6 engine.
• For information on the mechanical operation of the transmission, refer to General Motors Powertrain Group
Electronically Controlled Automatic Transmission Technician's Guide.
• For further information on the TCM, refer to 3.1 Transmission Control Module.

2.1 Transmission Control Module – HFV6


Vehicles fitted with a V6 engine and the 4L60E transmission have a new control module and data bus architecture from
previous models. This is due to the introduction of the new V6 engine. Mechanically, the transmission has not changed.
V6 equipped vehicles are now fitted with T42 – Delphi with GMPT software, transmission control module (TCM) to
control all transmission operations. For further information on the TCM and its operation, refer to 3 Transmission Control
Module Operation Overview.

2.2 Transmission Identification


The 4L60E automatic transmission application and identification can be determined from the stamping at the rear of the
transmission , in the location (7) as shown in Figure 7C1 – 1.
Identification is as follows:
(1) model year,
• (6 = 2006).

(2) Broad Cast Code Identifier,


• HHD = RWD – 3.6 litre HFV6
• HLD = 4WD – 3.6 litre HFV6
(D = model 4L60E).

(3) Manufacturer Source Code,


• (4 = Ramos).

(4) Julian date (day of the year).

(5) Shift Build,


• 'A','B','J' = First shift,
• 'C','H','W' = Second shift.

(6) Individual transmission serial number.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–7

Figure 7C1 – 1

Legend
1 Model year 4 Julian Date 6 Individual Transmission Serial Number
2 Broad Cast Code Identifier 5 Shift Build 7 Identification Stamping Location
3 Manufacturer Source Code

2.3 Economy, Power and Cruise Modes


The programming in the transmission control module (TCM) allows for different shift patterns, which are driver
controllable through the use of the power (PWR) button. The power button is located in the centre console.

Economy Mode
The calibration for this mode is for maximum comfort, with minimal intrusion of engine noise and smooth shifts under all
driving conditions. When additional power is required for acceleration, full throttle upshifts are similar to those calibrated
for the power mode.

Power Mode
When activated, the TCM modifies the transmission calibration in the following ways:
1 When the throttle is less than 80% open, later upshift points are provided.
2 Shift time is reduced.
3 The torque converter clutch (TCC) will be applied in both the third and fourth speed ranges.

Cruise Mode
When the driver activates the cruise control (where fitted), the power icon in the instrument clusters multi-function display
(MFD) will be deactivated (provided the vehicle was operating in power mode) and the transmission shift pattern will
switch to the cruise control pattern. When in this mode, the TCM modifies the shift pattern so that earlier downshift and
later upshift points are provided.
Through the electronic programming of the logic processes contained in the TCM, the frequency of gear shifting and
torque converter clutch application and release is minimised. The end result of these logic processes, is that a quick
series of upshifts and downshifts (e.g. a '4 – 3 – 4' shift pattern) is minimised.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–8

2.4 System Protection Devices


Should 1st gear be selected and left in that range, the TCM will protect the engine from an over-speeding condition by
upshifting to 2nd gear at a pre-determined point. Similarly, the TCM provides high speed, downshift protection by
preventing a manual shift into 1st gear above pre-determined engine speeds.
Under severe operating conditions such as towing in high ambient temperatures, fluid temperatures can rise to a point
where lubrication breakdown can occur. In addition to having an oil cooler fitted to the vehicle, the 4L60E transmission is
also fitted with a transmission fluid temperature sensor located in the Transmission Range (TR) Pressure Switch
Assembly (PSA).
When fluid temperatures in excess of 135°C are sensed, the torque converter clutch is applied as programmed, in 3rd or
4th gear. This action reduces further the fluid temperature during normal operation of the torque converter. While these
high fluid temperatures are sensed however, torque converter clutch apply is not available when the throttle opening is
above 50%.
Similarly, when the fluid temperature is below 29°C, the TCM prevents torque converter clutch apply.
If a condition occurs, preventing electronic control of the transmission's functions, a 'Fail Safe' mode will default the
transmission to 3rd gear when either Drive or 3 is selected, applying also maximum line pressure. While in this mode, the
vehicle operator can still manually select 2, 1, Reverse, Park or Neutral, should the need arise.

2.5 Self Diagnosis


If any transmission operation controlled by the TCM begins to operate outside its pre-set parameters, the TCM has the
ability to store a range of diagnostic codes which can be accessed by the servicing technician, thereby localising the
problem.

2.6 TCM Sensors and Actuators


As indicated earlier, there are a number of sensors and switches providing input information for the TCM programming
that will allow the TCM to change the shift pattern, shift feel and torque converter clutch operation.
The TCM does this by comparing this input information with its predetermined values on shift pattern, fluid pressure
maps, shift duration parameters, extreme heat protection programming and adaptive controls.
In addition, each input signal and output actuator operation is also monitored and if outside its pre-set parameters, a
diagnostic code is logged for future reference by the servicing technician.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–9

3 Transmission Control Module


Operation Overview
3.1 Transmission Control Module
With the introduction of the new HFV6 engine, the powertrain architecture has been redesigned to accommodate this
introduction. With this design, a new bus architecture and protocol has also been introduced. The new bus connects the
following modules:
• engine control module (ECM),
• transmission control module (TCM),
• powertrain interface module (PIM) and
• ABS module.
The protocol used to communicate between these modules is called General Motors Local Area Network (GM LAN)
which is based on Controller Area Network (CAN) communication protocol. For further information on GM LAN protocol
and data bus structure, refer to 6E1 Powertrain Interface Module – V6.

Component Location
The TCM (1) is located under the instrument panel, it is attached to a bracket mounted to the firewall as shown in
Figure 7C1 – 2.
For the other components using the GM LAN databus, refer to 6E1 Powertrain Interface Module – V6.

Figure 7C1 – 2

Transmission Control Module Data Transfer


The TCM uses various information to control the shift of the transmission. Besides the direct inputs from the various
transmission sensors directly into the TCM, the TCM uses data from the GM LAN databus.
The inputs/outputs directly connected to the TCM from the transmission are:
• shift solenoids,
• torque converter clutch control,
• pressure control solenoid,
• transmission fluid temperature sensor and
• vehicle speed sensor.
Refer to 3.2 TCM Wiring Diagrams.
The transmission also receives inputs from the park/neutral position and back up lamp switch assembly.
The TCM needs other various data parameters to control the transmission correctly. These include throttle plate angle,
whether cruise control is engaged and active or not, engine RPM etc. These are provided to the TCM from the ECM via
serial data using GM LAN communication protocol.
The TCM also supplies information that is used by other components and systems within the vehicle such as the engine
control module (ECM) and instrument cluster. Any information that is required on the body side of the data bus (UART
protocol) is translated by the powertrain interface module (PIM). For further information on the data bus structure, the
PIM and its operation, refer to 6E1 Powertrain Interface Module – V6.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–10

Transmission Control Module Operation


The TCM processes data every 10 milliseconds from various sensors, such as throttle position, vehicle speed, gear
range, temperature, engine load and other inputs. The TCM compares all its various inputs with the internal programming
and calibration of the TCM using this data, a signal is transmitted to the valve body shift solenoids, which activate the
shift valves for precise shift control. Shift points are therefore precisely controlled and are identical from vehicle to vehicle.
The TCM also control torque converter clutch apply and release.
Shift feel is also electronically controlled by the TCM, by signals sent to the variable force solenoid, which controls fluid
line pressure and it is this pressure that precisely determines how the shifts will feel. In this way, the TCM electronically
synchronises the engine and transmission into a single integrated powertrain system for optimum performance, shift
timing, fuel efficiency and emission control.

3.2 TCM Wiring Diagrams


For details of the transmission control module (TCM) wiring diagrams, refer to 8A Electrical-Body and Chassis.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–11

4 Transmission Definitions and


Abbreviations
The following definitions and abbreviations are provided to establish a common language and assist the user in
describing transmission related conditions. The use of these terms and/or conditions can be found in the various parts of
the automatic transmission sections, but more particularly in 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and
Mechanical Diagnosis.

4.1 Throttle Position Related Definitions


Throttle Position Definition

Minimum Throttle The least amount of throttle opening required for an upshift.

Light Throttle Approximately 1/4 of accelerator pedal travel (25% Throttle Position).

Medium Throttle Approximately 1/2 of accelerator pedal travel (50% Throttle Position).

Heavy Throttle Approximately 3/4 of accelerator pedal travel (75% Throttle Position).

Wide Open Throttle (WOT) Full travel of the accelerator pedal (100% Throttle Position).

Full Throttle Detent Downshift A quick apply of the accelerator pedal to its full travel, forcing a downshift.

Zero Throttle Coast Down A full release of the accelerator pedal while the car is in motion and in drive range.

Engine Braking A condition where the engine is used to slow the car by manually downshifting
during a zero throttle coast down.

4.2 Noise Condition Related Definitions


Noise Condition Definition

Planetary Gear Noise A whine related to car speed most noticeable in first gear or reverse. Becomes less
noticeable after an upshift.

Pump Noise A high pitch whine increasing with engine r.p.m.

4.3 General Definitions


General Definition

Accumulator A component of the transmission that absorbs hydraulic pressure during the apply of a
clutch or band. Accumulators are designed to control the quality of a shift from one
gear range to another.

Adaptive Learning Programming within the TCM that automatically adjusts hydraulic pressures in order to
compensate for changes in the transmission (i.e. component wear).

Applied An 'Applied Component' is holding another component to which it is splined or


assembled to. Also referred to as "engaged".

Apply Components Hydraulically operated clutches, servo’s, bands and mechanical one-way roller or
sprag clutches that drive or hold members of a planetary gear set.

Apply Plate A steel clutch plate in a clutch pack, located next to the (apply) piston.

Backing Plate A steel plate in a clutch pack that is usually the last plate in that clutch assembly
(furthest from the clutch piston).

Band An apply component that consists of a flexible strip of steel and friction material that
wraps around a drum. When applied, it tightens around the drum and prevents the
drum from rotating.

Brake Switch An electrical device that provides signals to the transmission control module (TCM),
based on the position of the brake pedal. The TCM uses this information to apply or
release the torque converter clutch (TCC).

Centrifugal Force A force that is imparted on an object (due to rotation) that increases as that object
moves further away from a centre-point of rotation.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–12

General Definition

Check Ball A spherical, hydraulically controlled component (usually of steel) that either seals or
opens fluid circuits. It is also referred to as a check valve.

Clutch Pack An assembly of components generally consisting of clutch plates, an apply plate and a
backing plate.

Clutch Plate A hydraulically activated component that has two basic designs: (1) all steel, or (2) a
steel core with friction material bonded to one or two sides of the plate.

Control Valve Body A machined metal casting that contains valve trains and other hydraulically controlled
components that shift the transmission.

Coupling Speed The speed at which a vehicle is travelling and no longer requires torque multiplication
through the torque converter. At this point, the stator 'free wheels' to allow fluid leaving
the turbine to flow directly to the pump. (Also see Torque Converter).

De-energise(d) To interrupt the electrical current that flows to an electronically controlled device,
making it electrically inoperable.

Direct Drive A condition in a gears set where the input speed and input torque equals the output
speed and output torque. The gear ratio through the gear set is 1:1.

Downshift A change in a gear ratio where both input speed and torque increases.

Duty Cycle In reference to an electronically controlled solenoid, it is the amount of time (expressed
as a percentage) that current flows through the solenoid coil.

Energise(d) To supply a current to an electronically controlled device, enabling it to perform its


designed function.

Engine Compression Braking A condition where compression from the engine is used with the transmission to
decrease vehicle speed.

Exhaust The release of fluid pressure from a hydraulic circuit. (The words 'exhausts' and
'exhausting' are also used and have the same intended meaning.)

Fail-safe Mode A condition whereby a component (i.e. engine or transmission) will partially function
even if its electrical circuit is disabled.

Fluid In this Section of the Service Manual, 'fluid' refers primarily to automatic transmission
fluid (or ATF) and, for the Hydra-matic 4L60E transmission, the only recommended
fluid is Dexron III.

Fluid Pressure A pressure that is consistent throughout a given fluid circuit.

Force A measurable effort that is exerted on an object (component).

Freewheeling A condition where power is lost through a driving or holding device (i.e. roller or sprag
clutches).

Friction Material A heat and wear resistant fibrous material, bonded to clutch plates and bands.

Gear A round, toothed device that is used for transmitting torque through other components.

Gear Range A specific speed to torque ratio at which the transmission is operating (i.e. 1st gear,
2nd gear etc.).

Gear Ratio Revolutions of an input gear as compared to the revolutions of an output gear. It can
also be expressed as the number of teeth on a gear as compared to the number of
teeth on a gear that it is in mesh with.

Hydraulic Circuit A fluid passage which often includes the mechanical components in that circuit
designed to perform a specific function.

Input A starting point for torque, revolutions or energy into another component of the
transmission.

Internal Gear The outermost member of a gear set that has gear teeth in constant mesh with the
planetary pinion gears of the gear set.

Land (Valve Land) The larger diameters of a spool valve that contact the valve bore or bushing.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–13

General Definition

Line Pressure The main fluid pressure in a hydraulic system created by the pump and pressure
regulator valve.

Manual Valve A spool valve that distributes fluid to various hydraulic circuits and is mechanically
linked to the gear selector lever.

Orifice A restricting device (usually a hole in the spacer plate) for controlling pressure build up
into another circuit.

Overdrive An operating condition in the gear set allowing output speed to be higher than input
speed and output torque to be lower than input torque.

Overrunning The function of a one-way mechanical clutch that allows the clutch to freewheel during
certain operating conditions of the transmission.

Pedal Position The percentage angle of the accelerator pedal as displayed by Tech 2.

Pinion Gears Pinion gears (housed in a carrier) that are in constant mesh with a circumferential
internal gear and centralised sun gear.

Planetary Gear Set An assembly of gears that consists of an internal gear, planet pinion gears with a
carrier, and a sun gear.

Pressure A measurable force that is exerted on an area and expressed as kilopascals (kPa).

Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) An electronic signal that continuously cycles the On and Off time of a device (such as
a solenoid) while varying the amount of On time.

Race (Inner or Outer) A highly polished steel surface that contacts bearings or sprag or roller elements.

Reduction (Gear Reduction) An operating condition in the gear set allowing output speed to be lower than input
speed and output torque to be higher than input torque.

Residual Fluid Pressure Excess pressure contained within an area after the supply pressure has been
terminated.

Roller Clutch A mechanical clutch (holding device) consisting of roller bearings assembled between
inner and outer races.

Servo A spring loaded device consisting of a piston in a bore that is operated (stroked) by
hydraulic pressure to apply or release a band.

Spool Valve A round hydraulic control valve often containing a variety of land and valley diameters.

Sprag Clutch A mechanical clutch (holding device consisting of "figure eight" like elements
assembled between inner and outer races.

Staking The effect of deforming, peening over or riveting a shaft to provide a solid mounting.

Throttle Position The travel of the throttle plate that is expressed in percentages and measured by
Tech 2.

Torque A measurable twisting force expressed in terms of Newton metres (Nm).

Torque Converter A component of an automatic transmission, (attached to the engine flex plate) that
transfers torque from the engine to the transmission through a fluid coupling.

Torx Plus Bit A special tool used for the removal of the bell housing. Precision tip fit means that cam
out of the bolt head is virtually eliminated.
NOTE
Torx Plus Bits are different from normal Torx Bits

Transmission Control Module An electronic device that manages the vehicle's engine and automatic transmission
(TCM) functions.

Variable Capacity Pump The device that provides fluid for operating the hydraulic circuits in the transmission.
The amount of fluid supplied varies depending on vehicle operating conditions.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–14

4.4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Definition

2WD Two Wheel Drive.

AC Alternating Current

A/C Air Conditioning

AFL Actuator Feed Limit

4WD Four Wheel Drive

DC Direct Current

D.C Duty Cycle

DLC Diagnostic Link Connector

DTC Diagnostic Trouble Code

ECM Engine Control Module

ECT Sensor Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor.

ETC Electronic Throttle Control

N.C Normally Closed

N.O. Normally Open

PCS Pressure Control Solenoid (or Force Motor)

PIM Powertrain Interface Module

PWM Pulse Width Modulated

RWD Rear Wheel Drive.

TCC Torque Converter Clutch.

TCM Transmission Control Module

TFP Switch Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch

TFT Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor.

TP Sensor Throttle Position Sensor.

VS Sensor Vehicle Speed Sensor.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–15

5 Service Notes
In the interests of safety to personnel, equipment and to the vehicle and its components, read and adhere to the following
notes whenever servicing operations are to be carried out on the Hydra-matic 4L60E automatic transmission. In addition,
some of this information also refers to sound workshop practices and, to achieve the design life of affected components.

Fasteners
• Always reinstall fasteners in the same locations as they were removed.
• If a fastener requires replacement, always use a part of the correct part number or of equal size and strength or
stronger.

General Workshop Practice


• Keep work area and tools clean.
• To avoid unnecessary contamination, always clean the exterior of the transmission before removing any parts.
• Do not use wiping cloths or rags because of the risk of lint being trapped in the transmission.
• Do not use solvents on:
• neoprene seals,
• composition faced clutch plates, or
• thrust washers.
• Always wear eye protection when using compressed air.
• Blow out all passages with compressed air. Only probe small passages with soft, thin wire.
• Handle parts with care to avoid nicks and scratches.
• Do not remove Teflon oil seal rings unless damaged or performing a complete overhaul.
• Expand internal snap rings and compress external snap rings to maximise retention and security.
• Lubricate all internal parts with transmission fluid (only use Dexron® III), as they are being installed.
• When installing cap screws into aluminium castings:
• always use a torque wrench and
• stripped or damaged threads in aluminium castings may be reconditioned by using commercially available
thread inserts.
• Once removed, replace all gaskets, seals and O-rings with new parts.
• Always use seal protectors where indicated and do not use gasket cement or sealant on any joined face unless
specified to do so.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–16

6 Torque Specifications
Oil pan attaching bolt............................................................................ 12.0 Nm
Shift selector base plate attaching nut ................................................... 7.0 Nm
Spring plate attaching screw .................................................................. 2.0 Nm
Selector lever knob attaching screw ....................................................... 2.0 Nm
Selector cable bracket attaching bolt.................................................... 22.0 Nm
Heat shield front attaching screw .............................................. 15.0 – 35.0 Nm
Heat shield rear attaching screw ............................................................ 9.0 Nm
Manual shaft linkage attaching nut ...................................................... 25.0 Nm
Neutral start and back-up lamp switch attaching screw............. 15.0 – 35.0 Nm
Vehicle speed sensor attaching bolt ........................................... 11.0 - 14.0 Nm
Transmission mount attaching bolt ...................................................... 50.0 Nm
Transmission support attaching bolt and nut ............................. 50.0 – 65.0 Nm
Transmission mount attaching nut ....................................................... 52.0 Nm
Heat shield to transmission support attaching bolt ............................... 52.0 Nm
Extension housing attaching bolt............................................... 42.0 – 48.0 Nm
1 – 2 Accumulator cover attaching bolt................................................. 12.0 Nm
TCC solenoid attaching bolt ................................................................. 12.0 Nm
Control valve body attaching bolt ......................................................... 12.0 Nm
Transmission fluid pressure (TFP) manual valve
position switch attaching bolt ................................................................ 12.0 Nm
Manual detent spring attaching bolt...................................................... 23.0 Nm
Spacer plate support plate attaching bolt ............................................. 12.0 Nm
Filler tube bracket attaching bolt................................................ 20.0 – 35.0 Nm
Vent pipe attaching bolt .......................................................................... 6.0 Nm
Transmission cooler lines bracket attaching screw .............................. 23.0 Nm
Torque converter housing attaching bolt ................................... 52.0 – 66.0 Nm
Torque converter to flexplate attaching bolt............................... 60.0 – 70.0 Nm
Torque converter cover attaching bolt ....................................... 12.0 – 16.0 Nm
TCM bracket attaching nut ..................................................................... 7.0 Nm
TCM attaching bolt and nut .................................................................... 7.0 Nm
Oil Pump Cover to Pump Body Attaching Bolt...................................... 25.0 Nm
Pressure Control Solenoid Retainer Attaching Bolt .............................. 12.0 Nm
Forward Accumulator Cover Attaching Bolt.......................................... 12.0 Nm
Oil Pump to Transmission Case Attaching Bolt .................................... 30.0 Nm
Torque Converter Housing to
Transmission Case Attaching Bolt............................................. 65.0 – 75.0 Nm
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–17

7 Transmission Specifications
7.1 General
Type
Hydra-matic 4L60E
Special Features
Electronically controlled shift pattern, feel and torque
Converter clutch operation
Overdrive 4th speed range
Selector Location ..................................................................................Floor mounted console
Gear Ratios
Park (P) ..................................................................................................................................–
Reverse (R) ....................................................................................................................... 2.29
Neutral (N) ..............................................................................................................................–
Drive (D – 4) ........................................................................................................................0.7
Drive (D – 3) ........................................................................................................................1.0
Second (2) ......................................................................................................................... 1.63
First (1) .............................................................................................................................. 3.06
Shift Speeds
Refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis
Oil Pressure
Refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis
Torque Converter
Number of Elements .................................................................. 3 plus torque converter clutch
Torque Converter Diameter and End Play
HFV6 ...........................................................................................................................258 mm
End Play .............................................................................................................. 0.1 – 0.5 mm
Lubricant
Type recommended................................................................................................ Dexron® III
Capacity......................... Nominal only. Check when transmission is at operating temperature
Service Refill............................................................................................................... 4.8 litres
Total (Dry)................................................................................................................... 8.8 litres
Fluid Cooling.....................................Transmission fluid to engine coolant in one radiator tank
Clutches and Band
2 – 4 Band:
Type........................................................................................... Composition lined, steel band
Operation: ....................................................................................................................... Servo
Adjustment:................................................................................................ Selective Apply Pin
Pin Size and Identification.
65.82 – 66.12 mm...................................................................................................... 1 Groove
67.23 – 67.53 mm...................................................................................................... 2 Groove
68.64 – 68.94 mm....................................................................................................No Groove
Reverse Input Clutch
Type................................................................................................................Multiple wet disc
Backing plate ........................................................................................................ (1) Selective
Clutch plate (numbers):
Steel .......................................................................................................................................4
Composition............................................................................................................................4
Belleville .................................................................................................................................1
Backing Plate........................................................................................................ 1 (Selective)
Backing plate, identification and thickness:
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–18

'2' ..................................................................................................................... 7.25 – 7.41 mm


'3' ..................................................................................................................... 6.52 – 6.68 mm
'4' ..................................................................................................................... 5.79 – 5.95 mm
Backing plate travel ......................................................................................... 1.02 – 1.94 mm
Forward Clutch
Type................................................................................................................Multiple wet disc
Clutch plate, (number):
Flat steel plates.................................................................................................................... (5)
Composition plates .............................................................................................................. (5)
Waved steel plate ................................................................................................................ (1)
Backing plate ........................................................................................................ (1) Selective
Backing plate, identification and thickness:
'A'..................................................................................................................... 6.97 – 7.07 mm
'B'..................................................................................................................... 6.38 – 6.48 mm
'C'..................................................................................................................... 5.79 – 5.89 mm
'D'..................................................................................................................... 5.20 – 5.30 mm
'E'..................................................................................................................... 4.61 – 4.71 mm
Backing plate travel ......................................................................................... 0.87 – 1.88 mm
Overrun Clutch
Type................................................................................................................Multiple wet disc
Clutch plates, (number):
Flat steel .............................................................................................................................. (2)
Composition......................................................................................................................... (2)
3 – 4 Clutch
Type................................................................................................................Multiple wet disc
Clutch plates, (number):
Flat steel .............................................................................................................................. (5)
Composition......................................................................................................................... (6)
Stepped apply plate ............................................................................................................. (1)
Backing plate ........................................................................................................ (1) Selective
Backing plate, identification and thickness:
'A'..................................................................................................................... 5.88 – 5.68 mm
'B'..................................................................................................................... 4.99 – 4.76 mm
'C'..................................................................................................................... 4.10 – 3.90 mm
Backing plate travel ......................................................................................... 2.10 – 0.90 mm
Low and Reverse Clutch
Type................................................................................................................Multiple wet disc
Clutch plates (number):
Flat steel .............................................................................................................................. (5)
Composition......................................................................................................................... (5)
Waved flat steel ................................................................................................................... (1)
Selective flat steel plate ........................................................................................ (1) Selective
Selective plate, (identification) and thickness,
measured dimension:
28.06 – 27.54 mm (identification NONE) ......................................................... 1.68 – 1.83 mm
28.59 – 28.07 mm (identification '0') ................................................................ 1.17 – 1.31 mm
27.54 – 27.03 mm (identification '1') ................................................................ 2.20 – 2.34 mm
Transmission End Play Check
Transmission end play check specification...................................................... 0.13 – 0.92 mm
Identification and washer thickness:
67..................................................................................................................... 1.87 – 1.97 mm
68..................................................................................................................... 2.04 – 2.14 mm
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–19

69..................................................................................................................... 2.21 – 2.31 mm


70..................................................................................................................... 2.38 – 2.48 mm
71..................................................................................................................... 2.55 – 2.65 mm
72..................................................................................................................... 2.72 – 2.82 mm
73..................................................................................................................... 2.89 – 2.99 mm
74..................................................................................................................... 3.06 – 3.16 mm
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–20

8 Special Tools
The following pages list and illustrate the special service tools required. The tools are classified into the following
categories:
Mandatory: When required to perform routine maintenance operations and adjustments, or are required to carry out
fault diagnosis procedures.
Desirable: These tools should be considered for purchase since their use will greatly facilitate performing designated
tasks and permit achievement of standard times.
Unique: These tools are those that must be employed when overhauling major assemblies or performing relatively
large tasks.
Available: Are those tools that are of a general nature for which commercially available equivalents exist, or tools
which have had previous application.
Unless otherwise specified, all tools are available from:
SPX Australia PTY. LTD.
Service Solutions
28 Clayton Road
Notting Hill, Victoria, 3168
Telephone: (03) 9544 6222
Facsimile: (03) 9544 5222

Tool Number Illustration Description Tool Classification

700-4208 Desirable
Pass-Thru Connector Remover
Used to release the four locking tangs
on the Pass-Thru connector from the
transmission case.
Previously released

J6125-1B Slide Hammer Unique


Used for a number of bush removal
operations.
Previously released

J8092 Driver Handle Unique


Used for a number of bush installation
operations.
Previously released

J8433 Puller Unique


Used with J21427-01 to remove the
output speed sensor ring from the
main shaft.
Previously released
J8763-02 Holding Fixture Unique
Used in conjunction with holding
fixture base J3289-20 to hold
automatic transmission.
Previously released.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–21

J21368 Oil Pump Alignment Band Unique


Used to align the two oil pump
sections before tightening the
securing bolts.
Previously released

J21426 Rear Seal Installer Unique


Used to install the extension housing
oil seal.
Previously released

J21427-01 Puller Adaptor Unique


Used with J8433 to remove the output
speed sensor ring from the main
shaft.
Previously released

J21465-2 Installer Unique


Used with driver J8092 to install the
front stator shaft bush.
Previously released

J21465-15 Remover Unique


Used in conjunction with slide
hammer J6125-1B to remove the
stator shaft front bushing.
Previously released

J23062-14 Bush Remover Unique


Used in conjunction with driver handle
J8092.
Previously released

J23327-1 Clutch Spring Compressor Unique


Needed to compress the clutch,
before dismantling.
Plate J42628 is also required.
Previously released

J23907 Slide Hammer Unique


Used with J29369-2 to remove the
reaction carrier shaft bushes.
Previously released

J25016 Oil Pump Seal Installer Unique


Used to install the oil pump oil seal.
Previously released
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–22

J25018-A Clutch Spring Compressor Adaptor Unique


Used with compressor J23327 to
compress the reverse input clutch
during disassembly.
Previously released

J25019-4 Bush Installer Unique


Used in conjunction with J8092
Installer Handle.
Previously Released

J25019-9 Bush Installer Unique


Used in conjunction with driver handle
J8092.
Previously released

J25019-14 Bush Remover Unique


Used with slide hammer J6125-1B.
Previously released

J25019-16 Bush Remover Unique


Used with slide hammer J6125-1B.
Previously released

J29369-2 Universal Bush Remover Unique


Used with slide hammer J23907.
Previously released

J29882 Inner Overrun Clutch Seal Unique


Protector
Used to protect the inner, overrun
clutch piston seal from damage during
installation.
Previously released

J29883 Inner Forward Clutch Seal Unique


Protector
Used to protect the inner, forward
clutch piston seal from damage during
installation.
Previously released

J33037 2 – 4 Band Apply Pin Tool Unique


Used to check the selective apply pin
length.
Previously released
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–23

J34196-B Bush Remover/Installer Set Unique


Used for various applications,
described in the text.
Previously released

J34627 Snap Ring Pliers Unique


Specific purpose is to assist in the
removal/replacement of the output
shaft snap ring.
Previously released

J35138 Torque Converter End Play Unique


To be used in conjunction with
commercially available magnetic
stand and dial indicator.
Previously released

J36352 Speed Sensor Installer & Unique


Gauging Tool
Needed to correctly install the output
speed sensor ring to the main shaft.
Comprises sleeve, J36352-6 and C-
washer J36352-4.
Previously released

J36418-B Turbine Shaft Seal Installer & Unique


Resizer
Used to install and re-size the turbine
shaft seal. Comprises J36418-1B
installer and J36418-2A resizer.
Previously released

J37789-A Oil Pump Remover Unique


Used with J39119 to remove the oil
pump assembly.
Previously released

J38735-3 Stator Shaft Sealing Ring Installer Unique


Used with J39855-1 to install the
stator shaft seal.
Previously released

J39119 Oil Pump Remover Adaptor Unique


Used with J37789-A to remove the oil
pump assembly.
Previously released
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–24

J39855-1 Stator Shaft Seal Expander Unique


Used to expand the stator shaft seal
prior to installation.
Previously released

J39855-2 Stator Shaft Seal Resizer Unique


Used to re-size the stator shaft seal
after installation.
Previously released

J41510  Bit
T50 Torx Plus Unique
Used to loosen and tighten the torque
converter housing to transmission
case bolts.
Also released as 6194.
Previously released

J41778-1 Oil Pump Bush Installer Unique


Used with a bench press.
Previously released

J41778-2 Support Plate Unique


Used to support the oil pump during
bush installation.
Previously released

J42628 Plate Unique


Used with clutch spring compressor,
J23327-1.
Previously released

16296 12 Volt Black Light Desirable


Used with special, fluorescent dyes
for tracing a variety of fluid leaks.
Also previously released as J42220

70000861 Tech 2 Diagnostic Tool Mandatory

Previously released

J21867 Pressure Gauge And Hose Mandatory


Assembly

Previously released
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–25

J28431-B Fluorescent Oil Dye Desirable


Supplied in packs of 24, 1 oz bottles.
Suitable for black light tracing of
engine, transmission and power
steering fluid leaks.
Previously released

AU525 Quick-Connect Release Tool Mandatory


This tool is used on all engines with
automatic transmission.
Previously released

AU525

AU583 Selector Shaft Seal Remover/ Unique


Installer
Use to remove and install the manual
shaft oil seal, with the transmission
installed in the vehicle.
Previously released

J25025-B Dial Indicator Stand and Unique


Guide Pin Set
Used for the guide pins for aligning
the control valve body spacer plate.
Previously released

J41623-B Cooler Line Disconnect Tool Mandatory


Used to disconnect cooler lines at the
transmission end, Quick-Connects.
Previously released

7380 Pre-load gauge Mandatory


(J25765-A) (3/8” drive)
Used in several applications. In 7C5 it
is used in conjunction with J33037 to
measure selective apply pin length.
(0-17 Nm.)
Previously released
E308 Seal Remover Available
(56750) Used as a universal seal remover.
(49V012001) Previously released

J35616-C Electronic Kit Desirable


Used in conjunction with a multimeter
for measuring voltages and
resistances without damaging wiring
harness connectors.
Previously released

J44152 Jumper Harness Mandatory


Used for checking automatic
transmission during diagnostic
checks.
Previously released
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information Page 7C1–26

J39200 Digital Multimeter Available


Tool no. J39200 previously released,
or use commercially available
equivalent. Must have 10 meg ohm
input impedance.
Previously released
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–1

7C2
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical
Diagnosis
ATTENTION
Before performing any service operation or other procedure described in this Section, refer to 00 Warnings,
Cautions and Notes for correct workshop practices with regard to safety and/or property damage.

1 General Information ...............................................................................................................................8


1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................................ 8
1.2 General Description............................................................................................................................................... 8
Transmission Adaptive Functions ....................................................................................................................... 9
Limp Home Mode Description ............................................................................................................................ 10
1.3 Transmission Indicators and Messages ............................................................................................................ 10
1.4 Electronic Component Description .................................................................................................................... 10
Transmission Control Module (TCM) ................................................................................................................. 10

2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart ..............................................................................................13

3 Tech 2 Information ...............................................................................................................................14


3.1 Tech 2 Diagnostics .............................................................................................................................................. 14
Test Modes ........................................................................................................................................................... 14
Diagnostic Trouble Codes ................................................................................................................................ 14
Data Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 14
Snapshot .......................................................................................................................................................... 15
Additional Functions ......................................................................................................................................... 15
Miscellaneous Tests......................................................................................................................................... 15
Programming.................................................................................................................................................... 16
3.2 Data Display ......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Transmission Data............................................................................................................................................... 16
Transmission Data Parameters ........................................................................................................................ 16
TCC Data............................................................................................................................................................... 17
TCC Data Parameters...................................................................................................................................... 17
1-2 Shift Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 18
1-2 Shift Data Parameters................................................................................................................................ 18
2-3 Shift Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 18
2-3 Shift Data Parameters................................................................................................................................ 18
3-4 Shift Data ........................................................................................................................................................ 19
3-4 Shift Data Parameters................................................................................................................................ 19
3-2 Downshift Data............................................................................................................................................... 19
3-2 Downshift Data Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 19
Pressure Control Solenoid Data ......................................................................................................................... 19
Pressure Control Solenoid Data Parameters ................................................................................................... 20
Transmission Adapts .......................................................................................................................................... 20
1-2 Adapt Data ................................................................................................................................................. 20
2-3 Adapt Data ................................................................................................................................................. 20
3-4 Adapt Data ................................................................................................................................................. 20
Steady State Adapt Data.................................................................................................................................. 21
3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions ....................................................................................................................................... 21
3.4 Miscellaneous Tests ............................................................................................................................................ 23
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–2

4 Diagnostics ...........................................................................................................................................27
4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... 27
4.2 Basic Knowledge Required................................................................................................................................. 27
4.3 Diagnostic Precautions ....................................................................................................................................... 27
4.4 Preliminary Checks.............................................................................................................................................. 28
4.5 Diagnostic Trouble Code Tables ........................................................................................................................ 29
Multiple DTCs Fault Condition............................................................................................................................ 29
4.6 Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions ................................................................................................................. 29
Type A – Emission Related DTCs....................................................................................................................... 29
Type B – Emission Related DTCs....................................................................................................................... 30
Conditions for Clearing Type A or Type B DTCs .............................................................................................. 30
Type C – Non-emission Related DTCs ............................................................................................................... 30
Conditions for Clearing Type C DTCs .............................................................................................................. 30
Current DTCs........................................................................................................................................................ 30
History DTCs ........................................................................................................................................................ 30
4.7 Diagnostic System Check ................................................................................................................................... 30
Description ........................................................................................................................................................... 30
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 31
4.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List ............................................................................................................................. 31
4.9 DTC P0218 – Transmission Fluid Overtemperature.......................................................................................... 33
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 33
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 33
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 33
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 33
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 33
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 34
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 34
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 34
DTC P0218 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 34
4.10 DTC P0562 – System Voltage Low ..................................................................................................................... 35
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 35
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 35
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 36
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 36
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 36
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 36
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 36
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 36
DTC P0562 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 36
4.11 DTC P0563 – System Voltage High..................................................................................................................... 38
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 38
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 38
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 38
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 39
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 39
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 39
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 39
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 39
DTC P0563 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 39
4.12 DTC P0601 to P0604 or P1621 – TCM Malfunction............................................................................................ 41
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 41
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 41
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 41
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 41
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 42
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 42
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 42
DTC P0601 to P0604 or P1621 Diagnostic Table ............................................................................................... 42
4.13 DTC P0711 to P0713 – Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor .................................................................... 43
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 43
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–3

Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 43
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 43
DTC P0711 ...................................................................................................................................................... 43
DTC P0712 ...................................................................................................................................................... 43
DTC P0713 ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 44
DTC P0711 ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
DTC P0712 ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
DTC P0713 ...................................................................................................................................................... 44
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 44
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 44
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 45
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 45
DTC P0711 to P0713 Diagnostic Table ............................................................................................................... 45
4.14 DTC P0719 – Brake Switch Circuit High Input (Stuck On)................................................................................ 47
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 47
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 47
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 47
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 47
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 47
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 47
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 48
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 48
DTC P0719 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 48
4.15 DTC P0722 – Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit Low Voltage................................................................................. 49
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 49
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 49
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 49
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 49
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 50
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 50
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 50
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 50
DTC P0722 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 50
4.16 DTC P0723 – Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit Intermittent .................................................................................. 52
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 52
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 52
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 52
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 53
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 53
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 53
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 53
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 53
DTC P0723 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 54
4.17 DTC P0724 – Brake Switch Circuit Low Input (Stuck Off) ................................................................................ 55
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 55
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 55
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 56
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 56
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 56
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 56
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 56
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 56
DTC P0724 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 56
4.18 DTC P0741 – Torque Converter Clutch System – Stuck Off............................................................................. 57
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 57
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 57
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 58
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 58
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 58
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–4

Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 58


Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 58
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 58
DTC P0741 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 59
4.19 DTC P0742 – Torque Converter Clutch System – Stuck On............................................................................. 60
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 60
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 60
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 60
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 61
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 61
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 61
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 61
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 61
DTC P0742 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 61
4.20 DTC P0751 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Performance – No First or Fourth Gear ............................................. 63
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 63
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 63
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 63
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 63
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 63
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 63
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 64
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 64
DTC P0751 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 64
4.21 DTC P0752 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve Performance – No Second or Third Gear........................................... 65
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 65
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 65
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 65
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 65
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 66
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 66
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 66
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 66
DTC P0752 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 66
4.22 DTC P0756 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Performance – No First or Second Gear............................................ 68
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 68
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 68
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 68
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 68
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 68
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 68
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 69
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 69
DTC P0756 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 69
4.23 DTC P0757 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve Performance – No Third or Fourth Gear ............................................ 70
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 70
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 70
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 71
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 71
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 71
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 71
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 71
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 71
DTC P0757 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 72
4.24 DTC P0787 – 3-2 Shift Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage .......................................................................... 73
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 73
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 73
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 73
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 73
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 73
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–5

Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 73


Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 74
DTC P0787 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 74
4.25 DTC P0788 – 3-2 Shift Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage ......................................................................... 77
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 77
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 77
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 77
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 77
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 77
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 77
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 78
DTC P0788 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 78
4.26 DTC P0894 – Transmission Component Slipping ............................................................................................. 79
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 79
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 79
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 80
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 80
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 81
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 81
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 81
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 81
DTC P0894 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 81
4.27 DTC P0961 – Line Pressure Control Solenoid System Performance .............................................................. 86
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 86
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 86
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 86
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 86
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 86
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 87
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................... 87
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 87
DTC P0961 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 87
4.28 DTC P0973 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage .......................................................................... 89
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 89
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 89
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 90
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 90
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 90
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 90
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 90
DTC P0973 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 91
4.29 DTC P0974 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage ......................................................................... 93
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 93
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 93
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 94
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 94
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 94
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 94
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 94
DTC P0974 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 94
4.30 DTC P0976 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage .......................................................................... 96
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................... 96
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................... 96
Conditions for Running the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 96
Conditions for Setting the DTC........................................................................................................................... 97
Action Taken When the DTC Sets ...................................................................................................................... 97
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ........................................................................................................................ 97
Test Description................................................................................................................................................... 97
DTC P0976 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................... 97
4.31 DTC P0977 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage ....................................................................... 100
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–6

DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 100


Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 100
Conditions for Running the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 101
Conditions for Setting the DTC......................................................................................................................... 101
Action Taken When the DTC Sets .................................................................................................................... 101
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 101
Test Description................................................................................................................................................. 101
DTC P0977 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................. 101
4.32 DTC P1810, P1815 and P1816 – Transmission Fluid Pressure Position Switch........................................... 103
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 103
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 103
Conditions for Running the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 104
DTC P1810 .................................................................................................................................................... 104
DTC P1815 .................................................................................................................................................... 104
DTC P1816 .................................................................................................................................................... 104
Conditions for Setting the DTC......................................................................................................................... 104
DTC P1810 .................................................................................................................................................... 104
DTC P1815 .................................................................................................................................................... 104
DTC P1816 .................................................................................................................................................... 104
Action Taken When the DTC Sets .................................................................................................................... 104
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 105
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................. 105
Test Description................................................................................................................................................. 105
DTC P1810, P1815 and P1816 Diagnostic Table.............................................................................................. 105
4.33 DTC P2763 – Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage ............. 108
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 108
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 108
Conditions for Running the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 108
Conditions for Setting the DTC......................................................................................................................... 108
Action Taken When the DTC Sets .................................................................................................................... 108
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 108
Test Description................................................................................................................................................. 109
DTC P2763 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................. 109
4.34 DTC P2764 – Torque Converter Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage .............. 111
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 111
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 111
Conditions for Running the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 111
Conditions for Setting the DTC......................................................................................................................... 111
Action Taken When the DTC Sets .................................................................................................................... 111
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 111
Test Description................................................................................................................................................. 112
DTC P2764 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................. 112
4.35 DTC P2769 – Torque Converter Clutch Enable Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage ............................... 115
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 115
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 115
Conditions for Running the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 115
Conditions for Setting the DTC......................................................................................................................... 115
Action Taken When the DTC Sets .................................................................................................................... 115
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 116
Diagnostic Aids.................................................................................................................................................. 116
Test Description................................................................................................................................................. 116
DTC P2769 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................. 116
4.36 DTC P2770 – Torque Converter Clutch Enable Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage............................... 119
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 119
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 119
Conditions for Running the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 119
Conditions for Setting the DTC......................................................................................................................... 119
Action Taken When the DTC Sets .................................................................................................................... 120
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 120
Test Description................................................................................................................................................. 120
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–7

DTC P2770 Diagnostic Table............................................................................................................................. 120


4.37 DTC U0073 and U0100 – CAN-Bus No Communication With ECM (Engine Control Module)...................... 121
DTC Description................................................................................................................................................. 121
Circuit Description............................................................................................................................................. 121
Conditions for Running the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 121
Conditions for Setting the DTC......................................................................................................................... 121
DTC U0073 .................................................................................................................................................... 121
DTC U0100 .................................................................................................................................................... 121
Action Taken When the DTC Sets .................................................................................................................... 122
Conditions for Clearing the DTC ...................................................................................................................... 122
Test Description................................................................................................................................................. 122
DTC P0864 and U0101 Diagnostic Table.......................................................................................................... 122

5 Electrical Specifications ....................................................................................................................124


5.1 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications ..................................................................... 124
5.2 Range Reference................................................................................................................................................ 124
5.3 Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Logic .............................................................. 125
5.4 Transmission Range Switch Logic................................................................................................................... 125
5.5 Component Resistance ..................................................................................................................................... 126
5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio ...................................................................................................... 126
5.7 Line Pressure ..................................................................................................................................................... 126

6 Special Tools ......................................................................................................................................127


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–8

1 General Information

1.1 Introduction
This Section covers the electrical diagnostic for the 4L60E automatic transmission when mated to a V6 engine.

1.2 General Description


The 4L60E automatic transmission incorporates electronic controls that utilise a transmission control module (TCM) to
control shift points through:

• the 1-2 and 2-3 shift solenoid valves,

• the 3-2 downshift solenoid valve,

• a torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid valve,

• apply and release through the TCC pulse width modulated (PWM) solenoid valve, and

• line pressure through the pressure control (PC) solenoid valve.

Electrical signals from various sensors provide information to the TCM about the following:

• vehicle speed,

• throttle position,

• engine coolant temperature,

• transmission fluid temperature,

• gear range selector position,

• engine speed,

• converter turbine speed, and

• engine load braking and operating mode.

The TCM uses this information to determine the precise moment to upshift or downshift, apply or release the TCC and
what fluid pressure is needed to apply the clutches. This type of control provides consistent and precise shift points and
shift quality based on the operating conditions of the vehicle.

Figure 7C2 – 1 shows the location of the internal electronic components in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–9

Figure 7C2 – 1

Legend
1 Vehicle Speed Sensor 5 Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulation (TCC
PWM) Solenoid Valve
2 1-2 Shift Solenoid (Solenoid A) and 2-3 Shift Solenoid 6 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid Valve
(Solenoid B)
3 Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve 7 Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Valve
Position
4 3-2 Downshift Solenoid

Transmission Adaptive Functions


The 4L60E automatic transmission uses a line pressure control system, which has the ability to adapt the system line
pressure to compensate for normal wear within the transmission, such as the clutch pack fibre plates, seals, springs, etc.
The adapt feature is similar in function to the long term/short term fuel trim feature of the engine management system.

The 4L60E automatic transmission uses the adapt function for garage shifts, upshifts and torque converter clutch (TCC)
application. The TCM monitors the engine torque to determine if the shift is occurring too fast or too slow and adjusts the
pressure control solenoid to maintain the correct shift feel.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–10

Limp Home Mode Description


If a major electrical system failure occurs which could affect vehicle safety or damage the transmission during normal
operation, the TCM enters a limp home mode. In the limp home mode, the transmission operates in the following
manner:

• The pressure control solenoid is off and the line pressure is at maximum to minimise clutch slippage.

• The TCC solenoid is off, therefore the torque converter clutch is disabled.

• The two shift solenoids are turned off. The transmission will operate in fourth gear if the vehicle has successfully
completed a 1-2 upshift in the current ignition cycle. If the vehicle has not completed a 1-2 upshift in the current
ignition cycle, the transmission will operate in third gear. If the transmission is operating in fourth gear, third gear
may be obtained if the engine is stopped briefly and re-started.

In limp home mode, the gear selector lever is ineffective at selecting forward gear ranges. In third or fourth gear, heat
builds up in the transmission quickly, particularly in stop and go traffic. Excessive heat build-up may cause transmission
failure if the vehicle is driven for extended distances in limp home mode.

1.3 Transmission Indicators and Messages


For information pertaining to the instrument cluster and the transmission information it displays, refer to the RA Rodeo
Owner Handbook.

1.4 Electronic Component Description


For all other electrical components not covered in this section, refer to General Motors Powertrain Group Electronically
Controlled Automatic Transmission Technician's Guide.

Transmission Control Module (TCM)


The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is located under the instrument panel, next to the brake pedal assembly and
connects directly to the transmission wiring harness. A single 49-way connector is used to make the connection between
the vehicle wiring harness and the TCM.

To access the connector for diagnosis:

1 Ensure the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

2 Disconnect the connector (1) from the transmission control module (TCM) (2) as follows, refer to Figure 7C2 – 2:

a remove the securing pin (3),

b press the locking tab and swing the lever (4) to free the connector,

c remove the connector.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–11

Figure 7C2 – 2

The TCM is an electronic control module receiving input or providing output to control the operation of the 4L60E
automatic transmission.
The TCM receives the following inputs from the engine control module (ECM):
• engine speed and torque values,

• engine intake air temperature (IAT), accelerator pedal position (APP) information,

• engine coolant temperature (ECT),

• driver selected shift mode, and

• air-conditioning (A/C) status.

The ECM provides this data to the TCM through the databus.

Other TCM inputs are:

• battery and ignition voltage,

• brake switch status,

• transmission fluid temperature (TFT), and

vehicle speed sensor (VSS).

The TCM provides the following outputs to control the automatic transmission:

• shift solenoids to control transmission shifting,

• torque converter clutch (TCC) pulse width modulated (PWM) solenoid operation to control the apply and release of
the torque converter clutch assembly, and

• pressure control (PC) solenoid to regulate the transmission line pressure.

Other TCM outputs provided to the ECM / PIM are:

• MIL illumination request,

• vehicle speed,
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–12

• transmission fluid temperature,

• commanded gear status,

• TCC status, and

• torque reduction requests.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–13

2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector


Chart
For wiring diagrams and connector information, refer to 8A Electrica-Body and Chassis.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–14

3 Tech 2 Information

3.1 Tech 2 Diagnostics


Tech 2, with the appropriate software, cables and adapters,
when connected to the serial data link connector (DLC) can
read seat and exterior rear-view mirror serial data. The DLC
is attached to the instrument panel trim retainer beneath the
steering wheel.

1 DLC

2 DLC Adapter

3 DLC Cable

4 Tech 2

For additional general information on connecting and


operating Tech 2, refer to 0C Tech 2.

Figure 1A7 – 3

Test Modes
Tech 2 has six test modes for diagnosing the transmission. To get to these various test modes, on Tech 2 select:
Diagnostics / Model Year / Model / Vehicle Type / Transmission / Automatic Transmission
and follow Tech 2’s prompts. This will then display the following menu operations.

Diagnostic Trouble Codes


If Diagnostic Trouble Codes is selected, a selection list is displayed which contains:

• Read DTC Information – Once selected, both current and history diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored in the
transmission control module will be displayed.

• Clear Engine & Transmission DTC(s) – Once selected, DTCs stored in the transmission control module (TCM)
and engine control module (ECM) memory may be cleared.

• Freeze Frame / Failure Records – Shows Freeze Frame / Failure Records information. Freeze Frame / Failure
Records are types of snapshots stored in the memory of the TCM and contain data parameters from the TCM at
the time the DTC set.

NOTE
For a complete list of TCM DTCs, refer to
4.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List. For
further information on Tech 2 and it functions,
refer to 0C Tech 2.

Data Display
If Data Display is selected, a selection list is displayed which contains:

• Transmission Data – Once is selected, a list of transmission components and the TCM inputs are displayed along
with their status.

• TCC Data – Once selected, displays specific parameter information about the torque converter clutch controlling
devices and their circuits.

• 1-2 Shift Data – Once selected, displays specific parameter information about the 1-2 shift solenoid valve (shift
solenoid A) and its circuits.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–15

• 2-3 Shift Data – Once this mode is selected, displays specific parameter information about the 2-3 shift solenoid
valve (shift solenoid B) and its circuits.

• 3-4 Shift Data – Once selected, displays information on 3-4 shift timing.

• 3-2 Downshift Data – Once selected, displays information on 3-2 downshift timing.

• Pressure Control Solenoid Data – Once selected, displays specific parameter information about the PC solenoid
and its circuits.

• Transmission Adapts – Once selected, it has further sub menus:

• 1-2 Adapt Data – In this mode Tech 2 continuously monitors and displays 1-2 TAP cell data parameters.

• 2-3 Adapt Data –In this mode Tech 2 continuously monitors and displays 2-3 TAP cell data parameters.

• 3-4 Adapt Data –In this mode Tech 2 continuously monitors and displays 3-4 TAP cell data parameters.

• Steady State Adapt Data – In this mode Tech 2 continuously monitors and displays Steady State TAP data
parameters.

• System Identification: In this mode, Tech 2 will display the transmission identification screen. The following items
will be displayed; Identifier, Partnumber, Hardware Partnumber, Alpha Code, Software Version Number, Software
Partnumber, VIN Digit 1-10, VIN Digit 11-17.

NOTE
Further information about the Data Display mode
and the data parameter is contained in
3.2 Data Display.

Snapshot
In this test mode, Tech 2 captures TCM data before and after a forced manual trigger.

Additional Functions
If Additional Functions is selected, a selections list is displayed which contains:

• System Identification– In this mode, Tech 2 will display the transmission identification screen. The following items
will be displayed; Identifier, Partnumber, Hardware Partnumber, Alpha Code, Software Version Number, Software
Partnumber.

Miscellaneous Tests
If Miscellaneous Functions is selected, a selections list is displayed which contains:

• TCC Solenoid –Tech 2 can command the TCC solenoid on and off. Tech 2 will display whether the TCC solenoid
is active or inactive.

• TCC PWN Solenoid – Tech 2 can command the TCC PWM solenoid on and off. Tech 2 will display whether the
TCC PWM solenoid is active or inactive and torque percentage.

• TCC Apply – Tech 2 can command the TCC on when the vehicle is above 50 km/h.

• Shift Solenoid A – Tech 2 can command the shift solenoid A (1-2 shift solenoid) on and off.

• Shift Solenoid B – Tech 2 can command the shift solenoid B (2-3 shift solenoid) on and off.

• 3/2 Downshift Solenoid – Tech 2 can command the 3/2 downshift solenoid (3-2 shift solenoid) on and off.

• Gear Control – Tech 2 can incrementally command shift solenoid states to correspond to relative gear states. The
TCM will only allow single shift increments or decrements and does not allow a shift if it causes the engine RPM to
exceed a calibrated limit.

• Pressure Control Solenoid – This function allows the user to control state of the pressure control solenoid in
increments of 100 mA.

NOTE
For operating parameters of the Miscellaneous
Test, refer to 3.4 Miscellaneous Tests.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–16

Programming
If Programming is selected, a selection list is displayed which contains:

• Reset TAP Cells – This test allows the user to reset the Transmission Adapt (TAP) cells by pressing the Reset soft
key.

NOTE
Upon resetting the TAP cells the TCM loses all
learnt adaptive functions. When the vehicle is first
driven after this, the shifts may be harsh. This
harshness will ease as the TCM relearns the TAP
cells.

3.2 Data Display


If Data Display is selected, a selection list is displayed which contains the following:

Transmission Data
Once this mode, a list of transmission components and the TCM inputs are displayed along with their status.

Transmission Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

Engine Torque Nm Varies

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Engine Speed RPM Varies

AT Input Speed N/A N/A

AT Output Speed RPM Varies

Vehicle Speed km/h 0

Commanded Gear 1,2,3,4 1

Shift Solenoid A On / Off Varies

Shift Solenoid B On / Off Varies

3-2 Downshift Solenoid On/Off On

Estimated Gear Ratio Ratio 8.00:1

Speed Ratio Ratio 8.00:1

Torque Converter Efficiency Ratio .00:1

TFP Switch A Open 12 V / Closed 0 V Varies

TFP Switch B Open 12 V / Closed 0 V Varies

TFP Switch C Open 12 V / Closed 0 V Varies

Engine Coolant Temperature °C Varies

Transmission Fluid Temp °C Varies

Transmission Hot Mode On/Off Off

PCS Actual Current Amps Varies (0.1 – 1.1 A)

PCS Desired Current Amps Varies (0.1 – 1.1 A)

PCS Duty Cycle Percent Varies


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–17

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

High Side Driver 1 N/A N/A

TCC Solenoid On / Off Varies

TCC PWM Solenoid Percent 0%

TCC Slip Speed RPM +/-50 RPM from Engine Speed

Transmission Range (TR) Park/Neutral, Reverse, Drive4, Park/Neutral


Drive3, Drive2, Drive1 or Invalid

TR Switch A Open 12 V / Closed 0 V Varies

TR Switch B Open 12 V / Closed 0 V Varies

TR Switch C Open 12 V / Closed 0 V Varies

TR Switch P Open 12 V / Closed 0 V Varies

Latest Shift Seconds Varies

1-2 Shift Time Seconds Varies

2-3 Shift Time Seconds Varies

3-4 Shift Time Seconds Varies

Cruise Control Active / Inactive Varies

A/C Clutch On / Off Varies

Ignition Voltage Volts 12-14 V

Shift Pattern Normal / Power / Cruise Varies

4 Wheel Drive Low Active / Inactive Inactive

TCC Data
Once this mode is selected, displays specific parameter information about the torque converter clutch controlling devices
and their circuits.

TCC Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

TCC Solenoid On / Off Varies

TCC PWM Solenoid Percent 0%

TCC Slip Speed RPM +/-50 RPM from Engine Speed

TCC Duty Cycle Circuit Open or Shorted / Short to Battery / Okay


Okay

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Engine Speed RPM Varies

AT Input Speed N/A N/A

AT Output Speed RPM Varies

Engine Torque Nm Varies

Vehicle Speed km/h 0

Commanded Gear 1,2,3,4 1

Engine Coolant Temperature °C Varies


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–18

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

Transmission Fluid Temp °C Varies

Estimated Gear Ratio Ratio 8.00:1

Transmission Hot Mode On / Off Off

1-2 Shift Data


Once this mode is selected, displays specific parameter information about the 1-2 shift solenoid valve and its circuits.

1-2 Shift Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

Shift Solenoid A On / Off Varies

Shift Solenoid B On / Off Varies

Commanded Gear 1,2,3,4 1

1-2 Shift Time Seconds Varies

1-2 Shift Error Seconds Varies

Shift Solenoid A Circuit Open or Shorted / Short to Battery / Okay


Okay

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Engine Speed RPM Varies

AT Input Speed N/A N/A

AT Output Speed RPM Varies

Vehicle Speed km/h 0

Estimated Gear Ratio Ratio 8.00:1

2-3 Shift Data


Once this mode is selected, displays specific parameter information about the 2-3 shift solenoid valve and its circuits.

2-3 Shift Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

Shift Solenoid A On / Off Varies

Shift Solenoid B On / Off Varies

Commanded Gear 1,2,3,4 1

2-3 Shift Time Seconds Varies

2-3 Shift Error Seconds Varies

Shift Solenoid B Circuit Open or Shorted / Short to Battery / Okay


Okay

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Engine Speed RPM Varies

AT Input Speed N/A N/A

AT Output Speed RPM Varies


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–19

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

Vehicle Speed km/h 0

Estimated Gear Ratio Ratio 8.00:1

3-4 Shift Data


Once this mode is selected, displays information on 3-4 shift timing.

3-4 Shift Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

Shift Solenoid A On / Off Varies

Shift Solenoid B On / Off Varies

Commanded Gear 1,2,3,4 1

3-4 Shift Time Seconds Varies

3-4 Shift Error Seconds Varies

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Engine Speed RPM Varies

AT Input Speed N/A N/A

AT Output Speed RPM Varies

Vehicle Speed km/h 0

Estimated Gear Ratio Ratio 8.00:1

3-2 Downshift Data


Once this mode is selected, displays information on 3-2 downshift timing.

3-2 Downshift Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

3-2 Downshift Solenoid On / Off Varies

Commanded Gear 1,2,3,4 1

3-2 Downshift Solenoid Circuit Open or Shorted / Short to Battery / Okay


Okay

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Engine Speed RPM Varies

AT Input Speed N/A N/A

AT Output Speed RPM Varies

Vehicle Speed km/h 0

Estimated Gear Ratio Ratio 8.00:1

Pressure Control Solenoid Data


Displays specific parameter information about the PC solenoid and its circuits.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–20

Pressure Control Solenoid Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

PCS Actual Current Amps Varies (0.1 – 1.1 A)

PCS Desired Current Amps Varies (0.1 – 1.1 A)

PCS Duty Cycle Percent Varies

Engine Speed RPM Varies

Transmission Fluid Temp °C Varies

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Vehicle Speed km/h 0

Commanded Gear 1,2,3,4 1

Transmission Adapts
Once this is selected, it has further sub menus.

1-2 Adapt Data


In this mode Tech 2 continuously monitors and displays 1-2 TAP cell data parameters.

1-2 Adapt Data Parameter


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

1-2 Shift Time Seconds Varies

1-2 Shift Error Seconds Varies

Current TAP Cell 4-16 Varies

Throttle Position Percent Varies

1-2 Tap Cell (1 – 17) kPa Varies

2-3 Adapt Data


In this mode Tech 2 continuously monitors and displays 2-3 TAP cell data parameters.

2-3 Adapt Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

2-3 Shift Time Seconds Varies

2-3 Shift Error Seconds Varies

Current TAP Cell 4-16 Varies

Throttle Position Percent Varies

2-3 Tap Cell (1 – 17) kPa Varies

3-4 Adapt Data


In this mode Tech 2 continuously monitors and displays 3-4 TAP cell data parameters.

3-4 Adapt Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–21

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

3-4 Shift Time Seconds Varies

3-4 Shift Error Seconds Varies

Current TAP Cell 4-16 Varies

Throttle Position Percent Varies

3-4 Tap Cell (1 – 17) kPa Varies

Steady State Adapt Data


In this mode TECH 2 continuously monitors and displays Steady State TAP data parameters.

Steady State Adapt Data Parameters


For definitions of the parameters in this table, refer to 3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions.

Tech 2 Parameter Units Displayed Typical Data Value

Current TAP Cell 4-16 Varies

Throttle Position Percent Varies

Gear (1-4) TAP Cell kPa Varies

TCC (1-4) TAP Cell kPa Varies

Reverse Gear TAP Cell kPA Varies

3.3 Tech 2 Data Definitions


1-2 Shift Error: This parameter displays the difference between the desired 1-2 shift time and the actual 1-2 shift time. A
positive number indicates a firm or fast shift and the actual shift time was shorter than the desired shift time. A negative
number indicates a soft or slow shift and the actual shift time was longer than the desired shift time. This value is only
accurate if the shift was adaptable.

1-2 Shift Time: This parameter displays the actual time of the last 1-2 shift. The shift time is based on the engine r.p.m.
drop after the commanded 1-2 shift. This value is only accurate if the shift was adaptable.

1-2 TAP Cell (1-17): This parameter displays the amount of transmission adaptive pressure (TAP), based on 17 Nm of
engine torque increment per cell, added to or subtracted from shift pressure during a 1-2 upshift. A positive number
indicates that long shifts have been detected and PC solenoid pressure has been added to decrease shift time. A
negative number indicates that short shifts have been detected and PC solenoid pressure has been subtracted to
increase shift time.

2-3 Shift Error: This parameter displays the difference between the desired 2-3 shift time and the actual 2-3 shift time. A
positive number indicates a firm or fast shift, the actual shift time was shorter than the desired shift time. A negative
number indicates a soft or slow shift, the actual shift time was longer than the desired shift time. This value is only
accurate if the shift was adaptable.

2-3 Shift Time: This parameter displays the actual time of the last 2-3 shift. The shift time is based on the engine r.p.m
drop after the commanded 2-3 shift. This value is only accurate if the shift was adaptable.

2-3 TAP Cell (1-17): This parameter displays the amount of transmission adaptive pressure (TAP), based on 17 Nm of
engine torque increment per cell, added to or subtracted from shift pressure during a 2-3 upshift. A positive number
indicates that long shifts have been detected and PC solenoid pressure has been added to decrease shift time. A
negative number indicates that short shifts have been detected and PC solenoid pressure has been subtracted to
increase shift time.

3-4 Shift Error: This parameter displays the difference between the desired 3-4 shift time and the actual 3-4 shift time. A
positive number indicates a firm or fast shift, the actual shift time was shorter than the desired shift time. A negative
number indicates a soft or slow shift, the actual shift time was longer than the desired shift time. This value is only
accurate if the shift was adaptable.

3-4 Shift Time: This parameter displays the actual time of the last 3-4 shift. The shift time is based on the engine r.p.m.
drop after the commanded 3-4 shift. This value is only accurate if the shift was adaptable.

3-4 TAP Cell (1-17): This parameter displays the amount of transmission adaptive pressure (TAP), based on 17 Nm of
engine torque increment per cell, added to or subtracted from shift pressure during a 3-4 upshift. A positive number
indicates that long shifts have been detected and PC solenoid pressure has been added to decrease shift time. A
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–22

negative number indicates that short shifts have been detected and PC solenoid pressure has been subtracted to
increase shift time.

A/C Clutch: This parameter displays the condition of the sirconditioning compressor as either On or Off.

AT Output Speed: This parameter displays the rotational speed of the transmission output shaft. Tech 2 displays output
shaft speed as revolutions per minute (RPM).

Commanded Gear: This parameter displays the current commanded state of the shift solenoid valves. Tech 2 displays 1,
2, 3 or 4.

Current TAP Cell: This parameter displays the current transmission adaptive pressure (TAP) cell in use for transmission
line pressure adaptation. The cells are based on 17 Nm of engine torque. The higher the engine torque, the higher the
current TAP cell. The last cell used will remain displayed until the next adaptable upshift occurs.

Engine Coolant Temperature: This parameter displays the input signal from the engine coolant temperate (ECT)
sensor. ECT is high at 151°C when the signal voltage is low, 0 V. ECT is low at -40°C when the signal voltage is high,
5 V.

Engine Speed: This parameter displays the rotational speed of the engine expressed as revolutions per minute.

Engine Torque: This parameter displays the calculated value based on engine load, throttle position, mass air flow, and
other engine inputs. This parameter is accurate to within 20 Nm of actual measured engine torque.

Estimated Gear Ratio: This parameter displays the estimated turbine speed divided by the transmission output speed.
Estimated turbine speed is calculated from engine speed and engine torque.

Ignition Voltage: This parameter displays the system voltage measured at the ignition feed.

Latest Shift: This parameter displays the actual time of the last upshift. This value is only accurate if the shift was
adaptable.

PCS Actual Current: This parameter displays the current flow through the pressure control solenoid circuit, which is
measured by the control module. High current flow results in low line pressure. Low current flow results in high line
pressure.

PCS Duty Cycle: This parameter displays the commanded state of the pressure control solenoid, expressed as a
percentage of energised on time. A reading of low percent indicates zero on time, non-energised, or no current flow. A
high percent at idle indicates maximum on time, energised, or high current flow.

PCS Desired Current: This parameter displays the commanded current of the pressure control solenoid circuit. High
current results in low line pressure. Low current results in high line pressure.

Shift Pattern: This parameter displays Normal, Power or Cruise depending on what mode the transmission is in.

Shift Solenoid A: This parameter displays the commanded state of the 1-2 shift solenoid valve. When the transmission
st th
is in 1 and 4 gear, the display should indicate On; current is flowing through the solenoid. When the transmission is in
nd rd
2 and 3 gear, the display should indicate Off; current is not flowing through the solenoid.

Shift Solenoid A Circuit: This parameter displays whether an open or a short to ground, short to battery or the circuit is
okay in the 1-2 shift solenoid valve feedback signal. The 1-2 shift solenoid valve must be commanded off and on.

Shift Solenoid B: This parameter displays the commanded state of the 2-3 shift solenoid valve. When the transmission
st th
is in 1 and 4 gear, the display should indicate On; current is flowing through the solenoid. When the transmission is in
nd rd
2 and 3 gear, the display should indicate Off; current is not flowing through the solenoid.

Shift Solenoid B Circuit: This parameter displays whether an open or a short to ground, short to battery or the circuit is
okay in the 2-3 shift solenoid valve feedback signal. The 2-3 shift solenoid valve must be commanded off and on.

Speed Ratio: This parameter displays the calculated speed ratio of the transmission.

TCC Duty Cycle Circuit: This parameter displays whether an open or a short to ground, short to battery or the circuit is
okay in the TCC PWM solenoid valve feedback signal. The TCC PWM solenoid valve must be commanded off and on.

TCC Solenoid: This parameter displays the commanded sate of the TCC solenoid. On indicates a commanded
energised state; current is flowing through the solenoid. Off indicates a commanded non-energised state; current is not
flowing through the solenoid. This commanded state occurs at various vehicle speeds between applications.

TCC Slip Speed: This parameter displays the difference between transmission output speed and engine speed. A
negative value indicates the engine speed is less than the output speed, deceleration. A positive value indicates the
engine speed is greater than the output speed, acceleration. A value of zero indicates the engine speed is equal to the
output speed, TCC applied.

TCC PWM Solenoid: This parameter displays the commanded percentage of on time for the TCC PWM solenoid. A high
percentage represents an on, energised, commanded state.0 percent represents an off, non-energised, commanded
state.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–23

TFP Gear: This parameter displays Park/Neutral, Reverse, Drive4, Drive3, Drive2, Drive1 or Invalid. This parameter
is the decoded status of the three A/B/C inputs from the automatic transmission fluid pressure manual valve position
switch. If a valid combination of inputs is not detected, invalid will be displayed.

TFP Swi A/B/C: This parameter displays Open 12 V / Closed 0 V for each switch. This parameter indicates the statues
of the three inputs from the automatic transmission fluid pressure manual valve position switch assembly.

Throttle Position: This parameter displays a calculated value, which is determined by the accelerator pedal position and
the actual throttle position, used to optimise transmission controls. It represents the driver’s intended requested for
torque or acceleration. The range is 0-100%, 0% represents an idle or coast request and 100% represents a request for
wide open throttle (WOT).

Torque Converter Efficiency: This parameter displays a ratio of 0.00:1 to 2:1. The ratio is calculates by multiplying the
speed ratio by a value related to the ‘K factor’ of the torque converter. The ‘K factor’ is the looseness or tightness of the
torque converter for a given torque. The nearer the torque converter is to full coupling, i.e. 1:1, the closer the torque
converter efficiency number will be to 1.

TR Switch A/B/C/P: This parameter displays the status of the four inputs from the transmission range switch. Tech 2
displays Open 12V / Closed 0 V. Open 12 V indicates an ignition voltage input to the control module. Closed 0 V
indicates a zero voltage input to the control module.

Transmission Fluid Temperature: This parameter displays the input signal of the transmission fluid temperature sensor.
Transmission fluid temperature is high, 151°C, when signal voltage is low, 0 V. Transmission fluid temperature is low, -
40°C, when signal voltage is high, 5 V.

Transmission Hot Mode: This parameter displays the automatic transmission fluid temperature (TFT) and displays On
or Off. Off indicates the TFT has not exceeded 130°C. On indicates the TFT has exceeded 130°C and has not cooled to
120°C for greater than 5 seconds. These numbers are approximate and differ with transmissions.

Vehicle Speed: This parameter displays the speed at which the vehicle is travelling. Tech 2 displays vehicle speed as
kilometres per hour (km/h). The vehicle speed is calculates based on the input signal from the automatic transmission
output shaft speed sensor.

3.4 Miscellaneous Tests


Tech 2
Description
Miscellaneous Tests

• The TCM commands the 1-2 shift solenoid valve on and off. Tech 2’s Shift Solenoid A
Parameter should match the commanded state. Tech 2’s Commanded Gear
parameter should correspond with the shift solenoid combination. Refer to
5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio.

• When the ignition is on, and the engine is off, there no limits to this control. The
solenoid remains on until commanded off, and vice versa. When the test is exited, the
solenoid state is determined by the TCM.

• When the engine is running, the following control limits apply:


st rd
• Only sequential gear changes are allowed. For example, 1 to 3 is not allowed.
If a non-sequential gear change is attempted, the message Non-sequential
gear changes not allowed. Gear changes must be made in order appears
on Tech 2.

• The vehicle speed must be below a calibrated value. If the vehicle speed is too
Shift Solenoid A
high, the message Vehicle speed too high appears on Tech 2.

• The engine speed must be below a calibrated value. If the engine speed is too
high, the message Engine speed too high appears on Tech 2.

• Downshifts are allowed only when the vehicle speed is below a calibrated value.
If the vehicle speed is too high, the message Eng. is on and veh. speed to hi
for 3-2 or 2-1 downshift appears on Tech 2.

• The gear requested may not be greater than the current selected transmission
rd
range (PRNDL). For example, 3 gear is not allowed if the transmission range is
D2. If the gear requested is greater than the current selected transmission
range, the message Eng. running and gear request is greater than the
current TR appears on Tech 2.

• The solenoid remains on until commanded off, and vice versa. When the test is
exited, the solenoid state is determined by the TCM.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–24

• The TCM commands the 2-3 shift solenoid valve on and off. Tech 2’s Shift Solenoid B
parameter should match the commanded state. Tech 2’s Commanded Gear
parameter should correspond with the shift solenoid combination. Refer to
5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio.

• When the ignition is on, and the engine is off, there no limits to this control. The
solenoid remains on until commanded off, and vice versa. When the test is exited, the
solenoid state is determined by the TCM.

• When the engine is running, the following control limits apply:


st rd
• Only sequential gear changes are allowed. For example, 1 to 3 is not allowed.
If a non-sequential gear change is attempted, the message Non-sequential
gear changes not allowed. Gear changes must be made in order appears
on Tech 2.

• The vehicle speed must be below a calibrated value. If the vehicle speed is too
Shift Solenoid B
high, the message Vehicle speed too high appears on Tech 2.

• The engine speed must be below a calibrated value. If the engine speed is too
high, the message Engine speed too high appears on Tech 2.

• Downshifts are allowed only when the vehicle speed is below a calibrated value.
If the vehicle speed is too high, the message Eng. is on and veh. speed to hi
for 3-2 or 2-1 downshift appears on Tech 2.

• The gear requested may not be greater than the current selected transmission
range (PRNDL). For example, third gear is not allowed if the transmission range
is D2. If the gear requested is greater than the current selected transmission
range, the message Eng. running and gear request is greater than the
current TR appears on Tech 2.

• The solenoid remains on until commanded off, and vice versa. When the test is
exited, the solenoid state is determined by the TCM.

• The TCM commands the 3-2 shift solenoid valve on and off. Tech 2’s 3-2 Downshift
Sol. parameter should match the commanded state.

• When the ignition is on, and the engine is off, there are no limits to this control. The
solenoid remains on until commanded off, and vice versa. When the test is exited, the
solenoid state is determined by the TCM.

3-2 Downshift Solenoid • When the engine is running, the following control limits apply:

• The transmission range (PRNDL) must be Park or Neutral. If the transmission


range is not in Park or Neutral, the message :Engine running and
transmission range is not Park/Neutral appears on Tech 2.

• The solenoid remains on until commanded off, and vice versa. When the test is
exited, the solenoid state is determined by the TCM.

Clear TAPS • The TCM clears (or resets) the TAP cells to the original base value.
(Transmission Adaptive • There are no limits to using this test. It may be performed with the engine running or
Pressures) when the ignition is on, and the engine is off.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–25

• The TCM commands the current to the pressure control solenoid to control
transmission line pressure. As the current increases, the line pressure decreases. As
the current decreases, the line pressure increases. The current range is 0.00 – 1.10 A
and may be commanded in one-tenth of an amp increments.

• When the ignition is on, and the engine is off, the reference (commanded) amperage
may be controlled within calibrated limits. Tech 2’s parameter PCS Desired Current
changes by the parameter PCS Actual Current does not change. The reference
current remains until commanded otherwise.

• When the engine is running, the following control limits apply:

• When the transmission range is Park or Neutral, the reference (commanded)


current may be controlled within calibrated limits. The engine speed must be
PC Solenoid
less than 1,500 r.p.m. If the engine speed is great than 1,500 r.p.m, the
message TR in park/neutral and engine speed over 1,500 RPM appears on
Tech 2. Both Tech 2 parameters PCS Desired Current and PCS Actual Current
parameters change. Both current readings remain until commanded otherwise.

• When the transmission range is not in Park or Neutral, the reference current can
only be controlled less than the current determined by the TCM. The TCM does
not allow a value to be selected that may cause damage to the transmission. If
the requested amperage is more than allowed by the TCM, the message
Requested current for the PC Solenoid is too high appears on Tech 2.

• Transmission range DTCs must not be active. If a transmission range DTC is


active, the message Engine running with transmission DTC present appears
on Tech 2.

• The TCM commands upshifts and downshifts. Tech 2’s Commanded Gear parameter
should correspond with the shift solenoid combination. Refer to 5.6 Shift
Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio.

• When the ignition is on, and the engine is off, there are no limits to this control. The
Tech 2 shift solenoid states changes to match the Commanded Gear selected.

• When the engine is running, the following control limits apply:

• The TCM does not allow a shift if it causes the engine r.p.m. to exceed a
calibrated limit. If a gear is requested and the engine speed is too high, the
message Engine speed too high appears on Tech 2.

• The TCM does not allow a 3-2 or 2-1 downshift if the vehicle speed exceeds a
calibrated limit. If either downshift is requested and the vehicle speed is too high,
Gear Control the message Eng. is on and veh. Speed too hi for 3-2 or 2-1 downshift
appears on Tech 2.

• The TCM does not allow a 4-3 downshift if this vehicle speed exceeds a
calibrated limit. If a 4-3 downshift is requested and the vehicle speed is too high,
the message Vehicle speed to high appears on Tech 2.

• The TCM does not allow an upshift if the vehicle speed exceeds a calibrated
limit. If an upshift is requested and the vehicle speed is too high, the message
Vehicle speed to high appears on Tech 2.

• The TCM does not allow an upshift that is greater than the current selected
rd
transmission range (PRNDL). For example 3 gear is not allowed if the
transmission range is D2. If an upshift is requested that is greater than the
current selected transmission range, the message Eng. running and gear
request is greater than the current TR appears on Tech 2.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–26

• The TCM commands the duty cycle of the TCC PWM solenoid. The duty cycle is
represented by a percentage of on (energised) time. Approximately 90-100 percent
duty cycle represents an on (energised) commanded state. Zero percent represents
an off (non-energised) commanded state. Tech 2 TCC PWM Solenoid parameter
should match the commanded state.

• When the ignition is on, and the engine is off, there are no limits to this control. The
solenoid remains on (90-100 percent duty cycle) until commanded off (zero percent
duty cycle), and vice versa. When the test is exited, the solenoid duty cycle is
TCC Control Solenoid determined by the TCM.

• When the engine is running, the following control limits apply:

• If the transmission range is Park, and the transmission is in hot mode, the TCC
control solenoid may not be commanded off. If the solenoid is requested off, the
message TCC OFF command disabled in Hot Mode appears on Tech 2.

• The TCC control solenoid may not be commanded off for more than a calibrated
amount of time. If the solenoid is commanded off for a certain amount of time,
the message TCC OFF time has been exceeded appears on Tech 2.

• The TCM commands the TCC enable solenoid valve on and off. Tech 2’s TCC
Solenoid parameter should match the commended state.

• When the ignition is on, and the engine is off, there are no limits to this control. The
solenoid remains on until commanded off, and vice versa. When the test is exited, the
solenoid state is determined by the TCM.

• When the engine is running, the following control limits apply:

• If the transmission range is Park or Neutral, the TCC enable solenoid may not
be commanded off for more than a calibrated amount of time. If the solenoid is
commanded off for a certain amount of time, the message TCC OFF time has
been exceeded appears on Tech 2.
TCC Apply
• If the transmission range is Park or Neutral and the TCC control solenoid duty
cycle is less than maximum capacity, the TCC solenoid may not be commanded
on. If the solenoid is requested on during these conditions, the message TCC
Control Solenoid is not set to maximum Pressure appears on Tech 2.

• If the TCC control solenoid duty cycle is less than maximum capacity, the TCC
solenoid may not be commanded on. If the solenoid is commanded on during
these conditions the message TCC Control Solenoid is not set to maximum
Pressure appears on Tech 2.

• If the transmission is in hot mode, the TCC solenoid may not be commanded off.
If the solenoid is requested off the message TCC OFF command disabled in
Hot Mode appears on the scan tool display.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–27

4 Diagnostics

4.1 Introduction
The transmission diagnostic procedure is organised in a logical structure that begins with the diagnostic system check
and as such must always be used as the starting point. The diagnostic system check directs the technician to the logical
steps necessary to diagnose a transmission driveability fault condition.

4.2 Basic Knowledge Required

A lack of basic understanding regarding


electronics, electrical wiring circuits and use
of electrical circuit testing tools when
performing any diagnostic procedure, could
result in incorrect diagnostic results or
damage to system components.

Understanding of the following is required to perform any of the diagnostic procedures detailed in this Service
Information:

• Basic electronics,

• Electrical wiring circuits,

• Electrical circuits testing, and

• Correct use of basic system diagnostic tools.

4.3 Diagnostic Precautions

When tests are required on connector


terminals, use the adapters in connector
adaptor kit J35616-C to prevent damage to
terminals.

The following precautions must be observed when performing all diagnostic procedures. Otherwise, incorrect diagnostic
results or damage to system components will occur:

1 Disconnection of the battery affects certain vehicle electronic systems.

2 Disconnect the battery negative lead when performing the following procedures:

• Disconnecting the electronic control module wiring harness connector/s or

• Charging the battery.

3 Disconnect the battery terminal ground lead and the electronic control module wiring harness connector before
attempting any electric arc welding on the vehicle.

4 Do not start the engine if the battery terminal is not properly secured to the battery.

5 Do not disconnect or reconnect any of the following while the ignition is switched on or when the engine is running:

• Any electronic control module or system component electrical wiring connector, or

• Battery terminal leads.

6 Ensure that the correct procedure for disconnecting and connecting system electrical wiring harness connectors is
always followed. For information on the correct procedure for disconnecting and connecting specific wiring
connectors, refer to 8A Electrical-Body and Chassis.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–28

7 Ensure that all wiring harness connectors are fitted correctly and secure.

8 When steam or pressure cleaning vehicle components, such as engines, transmissions, etc., do not direct the
cleaning nozzle at any system electrical wiring harness connectors or components.

9 Do not clear any DTCs unless instructed.

10 The fault must be present when using the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Diagnostic Tables. Otherwise,
misdiagnosis or replacement of good parts may occur.

11 Do not touch any electronic control module connector pins or soldered components on the circuit board. This is
required to avoid the possibility of electrostatic discharge damage.

12 Use only the test equipment specified in the diagnostic tables, as other test equipment may give incorrect results or
damage good components.

13 Electronic control modules are designed to withstand normal current draws associated with vehicle operation.
However, the following fault conditions or incorrect test procedure may overload internal control module circuits and
irreparably damage the control module:

• A short to voltage fault condition in any of the control module low reference circuits may cause internal and/or
sensor damage. Therefore, any short to voltage fault condition in the control module low reference circuits
must be rectified before replacing a faulty component.

• A short to ground fault condition in any of the control module 5 volts reference circuits may cause internal
control module and/or sensor damage. Therefore, any short to ground fault condition in the control module 5
volt reference circuits must be rectified before replacing a faulty component.

• When using a test light to test an electrical circuit, do not use any of the control module low reference circuits
or 5 volts reference circuits as a reference point. Otherwise, excessive current draw from the test light may
damage the control module.

14 Disregard DTCs that set while performing the following diagnostic Steps:

• Using the Tech 2 output control function, or

• Disconnecting a control module system sensor connector then switching the ignition ON.

15 After completing the required diagnostics and service operations, road test the vehicle to ensure correct system
operation.

4.4 Preliminary Checks


The Preliminary Checks is a set of visual and physical checks or inspections that may quickly identify a control module
system fault condition:

1 Refer to relevant Service Techlines for information regarding the fault condition.

2 Ensure that the battery is fully charged.

3 Inspect the battery connections for corrosion or a loose terminal.

4 Ensure that all relevant control module system related fuses are serviceable.

5 Inspect for incorrect aftermarket theft deterrent devices, lights or mobile phone installation.

6 Ensure that there is no speaker magnet positioned too close to any electronic module that contains relays.

7 Inspect the system wiring harness for proper connections, pinches or cuts.

8 Ensure that all control module related electrical wiring connectors are fitted correctly.

9 Inspect the control module ground connections for corrosion, loose terminal or incorrect position.

10 Ensure that the resistance between the control module housing and the battery ground cable is less than 0.5 ohms.

11 Check that the control module and its mounting bracket is secure.

12 Check all control module related components for correct installation.

13 Check the control module and related wiring harness routing to ensure that no rubbing or cutting of the wiring
harness by sharp body components can occur.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–29

4.5 Diagnostic Trouble Code Tables


The diagnostic system check and the DTC list, directs the technician to the appropriate diagnostic trouble code (DTC)
tables if there is a DTC currently stored in the TCM.

The diagnostic tables locate a faulty circuit or component through a logic based on the process of elimination. These
diagnostic tables are developed with the following assumptions:

• the vehicle functioned correctly at the time of assembly,

• there are no multiple faults, and

• the problem currently exists.

Understanding and the correct use of the diagnostic tables are essential to reduce diagnostic time and to prevent
misdiagnosis.

Multiple DTCs Fault Condition


Some fault conditions trigger multiple component DTCs even if the fault condition exists only on a single component. If
there are multiple DTCs stored in the TCM, the service technician must view and record all DTCs logged.

Relationship between the logged DTCs can then be analysed to determine the source of the fault condition. Always
begin the diagnostic process with the DTC table of the fault condition that may trigger other DTCs to set.

The following fault conditions may trigger multiple DTCs:

• a fault in the serial data communication circuit,

• a system voltage that is too low may cause incorrect transmission tem operation or transmission component
malfunction,

• a system voltage that is too high may damage the TCM and/or other components,

• fault condition in the TCM Read Only Memory (ROM) or Random Access Memory (RAM),

• fault condition in the TCM internal circuitry or programming, or

• improperly connected sensor or component wiring connector.

If there are no obvious faults to begin a multiple DTC fault condition diagnostic procedure, refer to the Conditions for
Running the DTC in each diagnostic.

4.6 Diagnostic Trouble Code Definitions


The TCM constantly performs self-diagnostic tests on the transmission and it components. When the TCM detects a fault
condition in the transmission operating parameters, the TCM sets a DTC to represents that fault condition. The following
are the types of DTCs programmed in the TCM. In addition, DTCs are classified as either Current or History DTC.

• Type A – Emission Related DTCs,

• Type B – Emission Related DTCs, and

• Type C – Non-emission Related DTCs.

NOTE
Depending on the type of DTC set, the TCM may
command the malfunction indiciator lamp (MIL) to
display on the instrument cluster and warn the
driver there is a fault in the transmission. Refer to
the RA Rodeo Owner Manual for further
information on the MIL.

Type A – Emission Related DTCs


The TCM takes the following action when a Type A DTC runs and fails:

• sets a current Type A DTC that represents the fault condition,

• illuminates the MIL, and


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–30

• records the operating condition at the time the diagnostic fails and stores this information in the Freeze Frame/
Failure Record.

Type B – Emission Related DTCs


The TCM takes the following actions when a Type B DTC runs and fails.

• On the first time a Type B DTC fails:

• sets a current Type B DTC that represents the fault condition, and

• records the operating conditions at the time the fault sets and stores this information in the Failure Records.

• On the second consecutive ignition cycle that a Type B DTC fails:

• illuminates the MIL, and

• records the operating condition at the time the diagnostic fails and stores this information in the Freeze
Frame/ Failure Record.

Conditions for Clearing Type A or Type B DTCs


• The current DTC clears when there is no fault condition in the current TCM self-diagnostics.

• If there are no DTCs logged after six consecutive ignition cycles, the TCM deactivates the MIL.

• Type A or Type B History DTC clears when there is no fault condition after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles.

• Use of Tech 2 to clear DTCs.

Type C – Non-emission Related DTCs


The TCM takes the following action when a Type C DTC runs and fails:

• sets a current Type C DTC that represents the fault condition,

• records the operating conditions at the time the DTC is logged and stores this information in the Failure Record,
and

NOTE
The MIL does not illuminate when a Type C DTC
sets.

Conditions for Clearing Type C DTCs


• The current DTC clears when there is no fault condition in the current TCM self-diagnostics.

• Type C History DTC clears when there is no fault condition after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles.

• Use of Tech 2 to clear DTCs.

Current DTCs
A DTC is a Current DTC if the fault condition that triggers the DTC is present during the last TCM self-diagnostics.

History DTCs
A DTC is a History DTC if the fault condition that triggers the DTC is not present during the last TCM self-diagnostics.

4.7 Diagnostic System Check

Description
This section procedure is organised in a logical structure that begins with the diagnostic system check. The diagnostic
system check directs you in a logical direction to the appropriate Section or diagnostic procedure.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–31

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 Within this document there are a number of requirements that must be met before you can start diagnosis. Refer to
4.2 Basic Knowledge Required, 4.3 Diagnostic Precautions and 4.4 Preliminary Checks.

2 Checks if there is data communication between Tech 2 and the TCM.

3 Checks if the TCM has set any DTCs. If no DTCs have set, the functional test must be performed, which diagnoses
the hydro-mechanical functions of the transmission.

Step Action Yes No

1 Have you read the Basic Diagnostic Requirements, Diagnostic


Precautions and Preliminary Checks? Go to Step 3 Refer to Note 1

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission
and follow the instruction on Tech 2. Refer to 6E1
Powertrain Interface
Does Tech 2 display the TCM specifications? Go to Step 4 Module

3 On Tech 2 select: Perform the


Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information Functional Test,
refer to 7C3
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs? Automatic
Transmission –
Go to 4L60E – Hydraulic
4.8 Diagnostic and Mechanical
Trouble Code List Diagnosis

4.8 Diagnostic Trouble Code List

NOTE
If the DTC listed on Tech 2 is not contained in
this list, refer to OD Vehicle Diagnostics.

DTC Type Description Diagnostic Table

Transmission Fluid Overtemperature 4.9 DTC P0218 – Transmission


P0218 C
Fluid Overtemperature

System Voltage Low 4.10 DTC P0562 – System


P0562 C
Voltage Low

System Voltage High 4.11 DTC P0563 – System


P0563 C
Voltage High

Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory 4.12 DTC P0601 to P0604 or
P0601 A
(ROM) P1621 – TCM Malfunction

Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed 4.12 DTC P0601 to P0604 or
P0602 A
P1621 – TCM Malfunction

Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access 4.12 DTC P0601 to P0604 or
P0603 A
Memory (RAM) P1621 – TCM Malfunction

Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory 4.12 DTC P0601 to P0604 or
P0604 A
Performance P1621 – TCM Malfunction

Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor 4.13 DTC P0711 to P0713 –


P0711 C Performance Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor

Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit Low 4.13 DTC P0711 to P0713 –
P0712 C Voltage Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–32

DTC Type Description Diagnostic Table

Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit High 4.13 DTC P0711 to P0713 –
P0713 C Voltage Transmission Fluid Temperature
Sensor

Brake Switch Circuit High Input (Stuck On) 4.14 DTC P0719 – Brake Switch
P0719 C
Circuit High Input (Stuck On)

Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 4.15 DTC P0722 – Vehicle Speed
P0722 B
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit Intermittent 4.16 DTC P0723 – Vehicle Speed
P0723 B
Sensor Circuit Intermittent

Brake Switch Circuit Low Input (Stuck Off) 4.17 DTC P0724 – Brake Switch
P0724 C
Circuit Low Input (Stuck Off)

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System – Stuck Off 4.18 DTC P0741 – Torque
P0741 B
Converter Clutch System – Stuck Off

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System – Stuck On 4.17 DTC P0724 – Brake Switch
P0742 B
Circuit Low Input (Stuck Off)

1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance – No First or 4.20 DTC P0751 – 1-2 Shift
P0751 B Fourth Gear Solenoid Valve Performance – No
First or Fourth Gear

1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance – No Second or 4.21 DTC P0752 – 1-2 Shift
P0752 B Third Gear Solenoid Valve Performance – No
Second or Third Gear

2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance – No First or 4.22 DTC P0756 – 2-3 Shift
P0756 A Second Gear Solenoid Valve Performance – No
First or Second Gear

2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance - No Third or 4.23 DTC P0757 – 2-3 Shift
P0757 A Fourth Gear Solenoid Valve Performance – No
Third or Fourth Gear

3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit Low Voltage 4.24 DTC P0787 – 3-2 Shift
P0787 A
Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage

3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit High Voltage 4.25 DTC P0788 – 3-2 Shift
P0788 A
Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage

Transmission Component Slipping 4.26 DTC P0894 – Transmission


P0894 B
Component Slipping

Line Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid System Performance 4.27 DTC P0961 – Line Pressure
P0961 C
Control Solenoid System Performance

1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit Low Voltage 4.28 DTC P0973 – 1-2 Shift
P0973 B
Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage

1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit High Voltage 4.29 DTC P0974 – 1-2 Shift
P0974 B
Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage

2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit Low Voltage 4.30 DTC P0976 – 2-3 Shift
P0976 A
Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage

2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit High Voltage 4.31 DTC P0977 – 2-3 Shift
P0977 A
Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage

Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory 4.12 DTC P0601 to P0604 or
P1621 A
Performance P1621 – TCM Malfunction

Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Position Switch Circuit 4.32 DTC P1810, P1815 and
P1810 B P1816 – Transmission Fluid Pressure
Position Switch

Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Valve Position Switch - 4.32 DTC P1810, P1815 and
P1815 B Start in Wrong Range P1816 – Transmission Fluid Pressure
Position Switch
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–33

DTC Type Description Diagnostic Table

Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Valve Position Switch 4.32 DTC P1810, P1815 and
P1816 B Indicates Park/Neutral (P/N) with Drive Ratio P1816 – Transmission Fluid Pressure
Position Switch

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Pressure Control (PC) 4.33 DTC P2763 – Torque
P2763 B Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage Converter Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Control Circuit High Voltage

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Pressure Control (PC) 4.34 DTC P2764 – Torque
P2764 B Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage Converter Clutch Pressure Control
Solenoid Control Circuit Low Voltage

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Enable Solenoid Control 4.35 DTC P2769 – Torque
P2769 B Circuit Low Voltage Converter Clutch Enable Solenoid
Control Circuit Low Voltage

Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Enable Solenoid Control 4.36 DTC P2770 – Torque
P2770 B Circuit High Voltage Converter Clutch Enable Solenoid
Control Circuit High Voltage

ECM CAN Bus Error 4.37 DTC U0073 and U0100 –


U0073 B CAN-Bus No Communication With
ECM (Engine Control Module)

ECM CAN Bus Error 4.37 DTC U0073 and U0100 –


U0100 B CAN-Bus No Communication With
ECM (Engine Control Module)

4.9 DTC P0218 – Transmission Fluid


Overtemperature

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0218 Transmission Fluid Overtemperature.

Circuit Description
The flow of transmission fluid starts in the bottom pan and is drawn through the filter, control valve body assembly,
transmission case and into the oil pump assembly. The oil pump assembly pressurises the fluid and directs it to the
pressure regulator valve where it becomes the main supply of fluid to the various components and hydraulic circuits in
the transmission. Hot fluid exiting the torque converter flows through the converter clutch apply valve and into the
transmission cooler lines, to the oil cooler located in the vehicle radiator, and auxiliary cooler if equipped. From the cooler,
fluid returns to cool and lubricate the front of the transmission. In forward drive ranges, D4 fluid from the manual valve is
routed through an orificed cup plug in the rear of the transmission case to feed the rear lube fluid circuit.

When the transmission control module (TCM) detects a high transmission fluid temperature (TFT) for a long period of
time, DTC P0218 sets. DTC P0218 is a type C DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0711, P0712 or P0713.

• The ignition switch is on for 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TFT is greater than 130°C for 600 seconds (10 minutes).

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM does not request the ECM to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCM freezes transmission adapt functions.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–34

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM stores this
information as Failure Records.

• The TCM stores DTC P0218 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the DTC passes.

Diagnostic Aids
• Tech 2’s Transmission Fluid Temp. should rise steadily to a normal operating temperature, then stabilise.

• Ask about the customer's driving habits, trailer towing, etc. Trailer towing should occur in D3.

• Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission in 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical
Diagnosis.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Low transmission fluid can cause the transmission to overheat.

3 This step inspects for airflow restrictions or damage, which may result in the transmission overheating.

4-5 Decreased line pressure will cause the transmission to overheat. The torque converter stator is the pump for the
transmission fluid. If the torque converter is damaged, it may not be producing the required pressure.

DTC P0218 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission Perform the
DTCs. transmission fluid
checking procedure,
6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.
refer to
7 Inspect for correct transmission fluid level, refer to 7C4 Automatic
7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
Did you perform the fluid checking procedure? Go to Step 3 Servicing
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–35

Step Action Yes No

3 1 Inspect the engine cooling system and transmission cooling


system for the following conditions:

• Air flow restrictions

• Air flow blockage

• Debris

2 Inspect the transmission cooling system for damaged cooler


lines.

3 Check the flow rate of the transmission fluid, refer to


7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4

4 Test for correct line pressure, refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 Diagnose the torque converter stator, refer to 7C3 Automatic Check for an
Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis. intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
Did you find and correct the condition? 8A Electrical-Body
Go to Step 6 and Chassis

6 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Start and idle the engine until it reaches normal operating


temperature.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / Transmission Data.

5 Drive the vehicle for 10 minutes.

6 On Tech 2, monitor the Transmission Fluid Temp. and ensure


it has stabilised and is less than 129°C.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0218 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 7

7 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.10 DTC P0562 – System Voltage Low

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0562 System Voltage Low.

Circuit Description
The transmission control module (TCM) continuously monitors the system voltage on the battery and ignition circuits.
Lower than normal voltage may be inadequate to operate the transmission control solenoids properly. Improper solenoid
operation may cause erratic transmission operation and tie-up conditions, which may result in internal damage.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–36

When the TCM detects low voltage, DTC P0562 sets. DTC P0562 is a type C DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


The engine speed is greater than 1,200 r.p.m.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM detects system voltage less than 11 V for 10 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM does not request the engine control module (ECM) to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM records this
information as a Failure Record.

• The TCM stores DTC P0562 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

Diagnostic Aids
• Observe the instrument cluster’s multi-function display messaging that would indicate the electrical system requires
service.

• Inspect for the following conditions:

• Loose or damaged terminals at the generator, and

• Loose or worn generator drive belt.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

3 The alternator warning indicator will illuminate if there is a problem with the charging system of the vehicle.

4 Checks the charging system voltage with a nominal load.

5 Checks if the ignition voltage measurement reported by the TCM is within acceptable parameters.

7 Checks if there is battery voltage supplied to the TCM.

8 Checks if there is battery voltage supplied through the ignition circuit to the TCM.

9 Checks the ground circuits of the TCM.

DTC P0562 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–37

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.


Check the
7 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe across the serviceability of the
battery terminals. battery, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does the multimeter display greater than 11 V? Go to Step 3 and Chassis

3 1 Start the engine.

2 Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating temperature. Refer to


6D1-1 Charging
Is the alternator fail warning indicator illuminated? system – V6 Go to Step 4

4 1 Turn on the high beam headlamps.

2 Turn the HVAC fan control to the highest speed setting.

3 Turn on the rear window demister.

4 Increase the engine speed to 1,500 r.p.m.

5 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe across the


battery terminals. Refer to
6D1-1 Charging
Does the multimeter display 12.5 – 14.5 V? Go to Step 5 system – V6

5 1 Increase the engine speed to 1,500 r.p.m.

2 On Tech 2 select: Check for an


Data Display / Transmission Data intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
Does Tech 2 display the Ignition Voltage parameter within 12.5 – 8A Electrical-Body
14.5 V? and Chassis Go to Step 6

6 Check the fuses EB-4 and C-8 for serviceability. Replace the
affected fuse(s). If
Are the fuses serviceable? the fuse(s) blow
again, check for a
short to ground in
the fuses circuit

Go to Step 7 Go to Step 13

7 1 Turn off the ignition.


Check measured
2 Disconnect the TCM connector C-96. circuits for an open,
high resistance or
3 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between short to ground
connector C-96 pin 32 and a known ground.
Repair or replace
Does the multimeter display battery voltage? Go to Step 8 the affected circuit
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–38

Step Action Yes No

8 1 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between Check measured


connector C-96 pin 31 and a known ground. circuits for an open,
high resistance or
2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off. short to ground
Does the multimeter display battery voltage? Repair or replace
Go to Step 9 the affected circuit

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between Check measured


connector C-96 pin 49 and a known ground. circuit for an open or
high resistance
Does the multimeter display continuity?
Repair or replace
Got to Step 10 affected circuit

10 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing

Is the action complete? Go to Step 11 —

11 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Operate the vehicle under the following conditions:

a Start the engine.

b Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating


temperature.

c Raise the engine speed to at least 1,200 r.p.m.

d TCM voltage must be greater than 11 V for 12 seconds.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0562 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 12

12 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.11 DTC P0563 – System Voltage High

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0563 System Voltage High.

Circuit Description
The transmission control module (TCM) continuously monitors the system voltage on the battery and ignition circuits.
Higher than normal voltage may cause the solenoids inside the transmission to operate improperly or damage solid-state
components inside the TCM.

When the TCM detects high voltage, DTC P0563 sets. DTC P0563 is a type C DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


The ignition is on.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–39

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM detects system voltage greater than 18 V for 10 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM does not request the engine control module (ECM) to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM records this
information as a Failure Record.

• The TCM stores DTC P0563 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

Diagnostic Aids
• Observe the instrument cluster’s multi-function display for messaging that would indicate the electrical system
requires service.

• Use Tech 2 to inspect all other modules for voltage related DTCs.

• Running the engine with a battery charger attached may cause DTC P0563 to set.

• Inspect the charging circuit for high resistance.

• Inspect the vehicle battery for open or sulphated cells.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

3 The alternator warning indicator will illuminate if there is a problem with the charging system of the vehicle.

4 Checks the charging system voltage with a minimal load.

5 Checks if there is a difference between the Tech 2 reading and the voltage measure in an earlier step.

DTC P0563 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–40

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select: Refer to


Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. 4.10 DTC
P0562 – System
Has DTC P0562 set? Voltage Low Go to Step 3

3 1 Start the engine.

2 Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating temperature. Refer to


6D1-1 Charging
Is the alternator fail warning indicator illuminated? system – V6 Go to Step 4

4 1 Turn off all electrical accessories.

2 Increase the engine speed to 2,000 r.p.m.

3 Using the multimeter set to measure voltage, probe across the


battery terminals. Record the measurement for reference. Refer to
6D1-1 Charging
Does the multimeter display 12.5 – 14.5 V? Go to Step 5 system – V6

5 1 Leave the engine running.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / Transmission Data
and observe the Ignition Voltage on Tech 2.

3 Increase the engine speed to 2,000 r.p.m.

Is the difference between the voltage displayed on Tech 2 and the


voltage measurement in Step 4 greater than 1.0 V? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6

6 Did DTC P0563 reset? Check for an


intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Go to Step 7 and Chassis

7 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Is the action complete? Go to Step 8 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–41

Step Action Yes No

8 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / Transmission Data

4 Operate the vehicle under the following conditions:

a Start the engine.

b Allow the engine to warm up to normal operating


temperature.

c Observe the Ignition Voltage on Tech 2.

d Ignition Voltage must remain below 18 V for 12 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0563 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9

9 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.12 DTC P0601 to P0604 or P1621 – TCM


Malfunction

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports the following DTCs:

• DTC P0601 Transmission Control Module (TCM) Read Only Memory (ROM),

• DTC P0602 Transmission Control Module (TCM) Not Programmed,

• DTC P0603 Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Reset,

• DTC P0604 Transmission Control Module (TCM) Random Access Memory (RAM), and

• DTC P1621 Transmission Control Module (TCM) Long Term Memory Performance.

Circuit Description
The internal fault detection is handled inside the transmission control module (TCM). No external circuits are involved.
These DTCs are type A DTCs.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


The TCM runs the program to detect an internal fault when the engine is running. The only requirements are voltage and
ground. This program runs even if the voltage is out of the valid operating range.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM has detected an internal malfunction.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–42

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCM allows the vehicle to operate in transmission protection mode.

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM stores this
information as a Failure Record.

• The ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The ECM stores this
information as a Freeze Frame.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the third consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without an emission-related
diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 DTC P0602 indicates the TCM is not programmed.

DTC P0601 to P0604 or P1621 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0602 set? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Program the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0602 set? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5

4 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 5 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–43

Step Action Yes No

5 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Start the engine.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Have any of the DTCs in this procedure set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 6

6 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.13 DTC P0711 to P0713 – Transmission


Fluid Temperature Sensor

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports the following DTCs:

• DTC P0711 – Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Performance,

• DTC P0712 – Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage, and

• DTC P0713 – Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Circuit High Voltage.

Circuit Description
The automatic transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor is part of the automatic transmission fluid pressure (TFP)
manual valve position switch. The automatic TFT sensor is a negative coefficient thermistor. The transmission control
module (TCM) supplies a 5 volt reference signal to the sensor and measures the voltage drop in the circuit. When the
transmission fluid is cold, the sensor resistance is high and the TCM detects high signal voltage. As the fluid temperature
increases, the resistance of the sensor decreases, which lowers the signal voltage. This diagnostic monitors the TFT
circuit. The circuit may be functional, but not in the normal operating range. This diagnostic indicates stuck, erratic,
intermittent, skewed, or inaccurate values, indicating poor system performance. The TFT range is -40 – 151°C.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC

DTC P0711
• No DTC P0117, P0118, P0722 or P0723.

• DTC P0711 has not passed in the current ignition cycle.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The transmission fluid temperature is -39 – 149°C.

• For conditions 1 and 2 in Conditions for Setting the DTC, the engine coolant temperature is greater than 70°C and
has changed by at least 50°C since start-up.

• For conditions 1 and 2 in Conditions for Setting the DTC, the TCC slip speed is 120 r.p.m. or greater for
600 seconds (10 minutes) cumulatively.

DTC P0712
The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–44

DTC P0713
• No DTCs P0722, P0723.

• The output shaft speed is greater than 200 r.p.m. for 200 seconds (3 minutes and 20 seconds) cumulative.

• The TCC slip speed is greater than 120 r.p.m. for 200 seconds (3 minutes and 20 seconds) cumulative.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC P0711
One of the following conditions occurs:

Condition 1
• The transmission fluid temperature at start-up is -40 – 21°C.

• The vehicle speed is greater than 8 km/h for 900 seconds (15 minutes) cumulatively.

• The transmission fluid temperature has not changed by more than 2°C since start-up for 100 seconds (1 minute
and 40 seconds).

Condition 2
• The transmission fluid temperature at start-up is 129 – 150°C.

• The vehicle speed is greater than 8 km/h for 600 seconds (10 minutes) cumulatively.

• The transmission fluid temperature has not changed by more than 2°C since start-up for 100 seconds (1 minute
and 40 seconds).

Condition 3
The transmission fluid temperature has changed by 20°C or greater within 250 milliseconds and it has done this 14 times
within 7 seconds.

DTC P0712
The TCM detects a transmission fluid temperature of 150°C or more for 2 seconds.

DTC P0713
The TCM detects a transmission fluid temperature of -39°C or less for 25 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM does not request the engine control module (ECM) to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM calculates a default transmission fluid temperature based on engine coolant temperature, intake air
temperature and engine run time.

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM stores this
information as a Failure Record.

• The TCM stores the DTC in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission-
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the fault no longer exists and the DTC passes.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–45

Diagnostic Aids
• Tech 2 displays the transmission fluid temperature in degrees. After the transmission is operating, the fluid
temperature should rise steadily to a normal operating temperature, then stabilise.

• Verify the customer's driving habits, trailer towing, etc. Trailer towing should occur in D3.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

3 Checks the hardware components that affect the transmission fluid temperature.

4 Checks there is power supplied to the TFT sensor.

5 Checks the TFT sensor high reference circuit for serviceability.

6 Check the TFT sensor for serviceability.

7 Checks the TFT sensor low reference circuit for serviceability.

DTC P0711 to P0713 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / Transmission Data

8 Drive the vehicle and observe Tech 2 for either of the following
conditions:

• The Trans. Fluid Temp. does not change more than


2.25°C in 409 seconds since start-up

• The Trans. Fluid Temp. changes more than 20°C in


200 milliseconds 14 times within 7 seconds

• The Trans. Fluid Temp. less than -39°C?

Does Tech 2 display any of the above conditions? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 3


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–46

Step Action Yes No

3 Inspect the transmission and related components for the following:

• transmission fluid level,

• transmission fluid cooling system restrictions / blockages,

• debris in the transmission fluid,

• incorrect line pressure,

• torque converter stator operation, and Check for an


intermittent fault in
• transmission overload. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Was a fault found and rectified? Go to Step 10 and Chassis

4 1 Switch off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between


harness connector E-95 pin 16 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display 4.8 – 5.2 V? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 Test the TFT sensor signal circuit (between connectors E-95 pin 16
and C-96 pin 35) for a high resistance, open circuit, short to ground or
short to voltage fault condition.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 10 Go to Step 9

6 1 Switch off the ignition.

2 Remove the TCM fuses C-8 and EB-4, refer to 8A Electrical-


Body and Chassis.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector E95 pin 15 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display less than 5 Ω? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 15 and C-96 pin 30 for high
resistance, open circuit, short to ground or short to voltage fault
condition.

Was any fault found and rectified? Go to Step 10 —

8 Replace the TFT sensor, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

NOTE
Check for damaged wiring (short to ground, short to
voltage, high resistance or open circuit) or poor
connections inside the transmission assembly before
replacing the TFT sensor.

Was the repair complete? Go to Step 10 —

9 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing

Was the repair completed? Go to Step 10 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–47

Step Action Yes No

10 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Start the engine.

4 Operate the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC or
within the conditions in the Failure Records.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Have any of the DTCs in this procedure set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 11

11 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.14 DTC P0719 – Brake Switch Circuit High


Input (Stuck On)

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0719 Brake Switch Circuit High Voltage.

Circuit Description
The transmission control module (TCM) has a direct input from the stop lamp switch assembly. When the brake pedal is
pressed, 12 V is supplied to the TCM through connector C-96 pin 42.

When the TCM detects a voltage on the stop lamp switch signal circuit during acceleration, then DTC P0719 sets.
DTC P0719 is a type C DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0722, P0723 or P0724.

• The vehicle speed is 8 – 40 km/h for 6 seconds, then greater than 40 km/h for 7 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM detects voltage on the stop lamp switch signal circuit during acceleration.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM does not request the engine control module (ECM) to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM records this
information as a Failure Record.

• The TCM stores DTC P0719 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–48

Diagnostic Aids

• Verify if the brake pedal position sensor is


adjusted properly, refer to 8B Cruise
Control.
• Test drive the vehicle if a switch or circuit
condition cannot be located. An
intermittent condition may be duplicated
during a test drive.
• Application of the brake pedal while
accelerating may cause this DTC to set.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks the stop lamp switch is serviceable.

4 Checks if there is a stop lamp switch signal to the TCM.

DTC P0719 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Engine / V6 Engine / Data Display / Cruise / Traction Data.

3 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE Check for an


intermittent fault in
Ensure the brake pedal is in the rest position.
the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does the Stop Lamp Pedal Switch parameter indicate Inactive? and Chassis Go to Step 3

3 Test the stop lamp switch assembly, refer to 8B Cruise Control. Replace the stop
lamp switch
Is the stop lamp switch assembly serviceable? Go to Step 4 assembly.

4 1 Disconnect connector C-96 from the TCM.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between


harness connector C-96 pin 42 and a known ground.

NOTE
Ensure the brake pedal is in the rest position. Repair or replace
affected circuit

Does the multimeter display battery voltage? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Service.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 6 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–49

Step Action Yes No

6 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Operate the vehicle under the following conditions:

• Turn on the ignition, with the engine off for at least


2 seconds.

• Start the vehicle and idle for 5 seconds.

• Drive in D4 from 0 – 60 km/h 8 times in 1 ignition cycle.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0719 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 7

7 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.15 DTC P0722 – Vehicle Speed Sensor


Circuit Low Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0722 Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit Low Voltage.

Circuit Description
The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) provides vehicle speed information to the transmission control module (TCM). The VSS
is a permanent magnet generator. The sensor is mounted in the extension housing facing the rear internal gear which is
splined to the output shaft assembly. As the output shaft and internal gear rotate, the toothed rotor of the internal gear
produces AC voltage as the rotor teeth pass through the magnetic field of the sensor. The AC voltage level and the
number of pulses increase as the speed of the vehicle increases. The TCM converts the voltage to vehicle speed. The
TCM uses the output shaft speed signal to determine shift timing and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.

If the TCM detects no vehicle speed when there is engine speed in a drive gear range, then DTC P0722 sets.
DTC P0722 is a type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0723, P1810, P1815 or P1816.

• Ignition voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• TFT is -40°C – 150°C.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The throttle position is greater than 12 percent.

• The engine torque is 108 – 882 Nm.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The transmission output shaft speed is less than 50 r.p.m. for 3 seconds.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–50

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM illuminates the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the Conditions for Setting the DTC are
met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM calculates vehicle speed from the automatic transmission engine r.p.m. and commanded gear.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0722 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the sixth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without an emission related
diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• Inspect the rear internal gear teeth for damage.

• Visually inspect the VSS for cracks or damage.

• Ensure the VSS is properly torqued to the extension housing.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Disable the traction control system when performing this step. When the ignition key is cycled off and then cycled
back on, the traction control system defaults to on.

3 Checks the VSS for correct resistance.

4 Checks if the VSS and associated circuits are shorted to ground.

5 Checks the VSS produces an AC voltage when the output shaft is rotated.

6 Checks the integrity of the circuits between the TCM and the VSS.

DTC P0722 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–51

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Raise and support the rear axle assembly, refer to 0A General


Information.

8 Start the engine.

9 Disable the traction control system.

10 Place the transmission in any drive range.

11 On Tech 2 select: Check for an


Data Display / Transmission Data. intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
With the drive wheels rotating, does the Tech 2 AT Output Speed 8A Electrical-Body
parameter increase with the drive wheel speed? and Chassis Go to Step 3

3 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-44 from the sensor.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the


speed sensor pins 1 and 2.

Does the multimeter display 976 – 2354 Ω? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6

4 1 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector E-44 pin 1 and a known ground.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector E-44 pin 2 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display greater than 50 kΩ in both instances? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 1 Place the transmission in neutral.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure AC voltage, probe across the


speed sensor pins 1 and 2.

3 Rotate a rear wheel by hand.

Does the multimeter display 0.3 V AC? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–52

Step Action Yes No

6 1 Disconnect connector C-96 from the TCM.

2 Test circuits speed sensor circuits (between C-96 pin 16 and


E-44 pin 2; C-96 pin 41 and E-44 pin 1) for the following
conditions:

• Short to ground

• Open circuit

• Short together

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8

7 Replace the vehicle speed sensor, refer to 7C4 Automatic


Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Service.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 9 —

8 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Service.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 9 —

9 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Operate the vehicle so the transmission output speed is greater


than 500 r.p.m. for 3 seconds.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0722 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9

10 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.16 DTC P0723 – Vehicle Speed Sensor


Circuit Intermittent

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0723 Vehicle Speed Sensor Circuit Intermittent.

Circuit Description
The vehicle speed sensor (VSS) provides vehicle speed information to the transmission control module (TCM). The VSS
is a permanent magnet generator. The sensor is mounted in the extension housing facing the rear internal gear which is
splined to the output shaft assembly. As the output shaft and internal gear rotate, the toothed rotor of the internal gear
produces AC voltage as the rotor teeth pass through the magnetic field of the sensor. The AC voltage level and the
number of pulses increase as the speed of the vehicle increases. The TCM converts the voltage to vehicle speed. The
TCM uses the output shaft speed signal to determine shift timing and torque converter clutch (TCC) scheduling.

If the TCM detects an unrealistic drop in output shaft speed, DTC P0723 sets. DTC P0723 is a type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0722, P1810, P1815 or P1816.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–53

• Ignition voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• TFT is -40°C and 150°C.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The throttle position is greater than 12 percent.

• The engine torque is 108 – 882 Nm.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The transmission output shaft speed drops greater than 1,000 r.p.m. for at least 3.4 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM illuminates the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM calculates vehicle speed from the automatic transmission input shaft speed sensor and commanded gear.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0723 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the sixth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without an emission related
diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• Inspect the rear internal gear teeth for damage.

• Visually inspect the VSS for cracks or damage.

• Ensure the VSS is properly torqued to the transmission housing.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Disable the traction control system when performing this step. When the ignition key is cycled off and then cycled
back on, the traction control system defaults to on.

3 Checks the VSS for correct resistance.

4 Checks if the VSS and associated circuits are shorted to ground.

5 Checks the VSS produces an AC voltage when the output shaft is rotated.

6 Checks the integrity of the circuits between the TCM and the VSS.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–54

DTC P0723 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Raise and support the rear axle assembly, refer to 0A General


Information.

8 Start the engine.

9 Disable the traction control system.

10 Place the transmission in D3 range.

11 With the drive wheels rotating, slowly accelerate to 2,000 r.p.m.


and hold. Road test the vehicle if necessary.

12 On Tech 2 select: Check for an


Data Display / Transmission Data. intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
With the drive wheels rotating, does the Tech 2 AT Output Speed 8A Electrical-Body
parameter drop or fluctuate more than 1,300 r.p.m.? Go to Step 3 and Chassis

3 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-44 from the sensor.

3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the


speed sensor pins 1 and 2.

Does the multimeter display 976 – 2354 Ω? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 7

4 1 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector E-44 pin 1 and a known ground.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector E-44 pin 2 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display greater than 50 kΩ in both instances? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7

5 1 Place the transmission in neutral.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure AC voltage, probe across the


speed sensor pins 1 and 2.

3 Rotate a rear wheel by hand.

Does the multimeter display 0.3 V AC? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–55

Step Action Yes No

6 1 Disconnect connector C-96 from the TCM.

2 Test circuits speed sensor circuits (between C-96 pin 16 and


E-44 pin 2; C-96 pin 41 and E-44 pin 1) for the following
conditions:

• Short to ground,

• Short to battery,

• Open circuit, and

• Short together.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8

7 Replace the vehicle speed sensor, refer to 7C4 Automatic


Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Service.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 9 —

8 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Service.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 9 —

9 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / Transmission Data.

4 Operate the vehicle ensuring the transmission output speed


drop is less than 500 r.p.m. for 2 seconds and output speed is
greater than 500 r.p.m.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0723 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 10

10 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.17 DTC P0724 – Brake Switch Circuit Low


Input (Stuck Off)

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0724 Brake Switch Circuit Low Voltage.

Circuit Description
The transmission control module receives a direct input from the stop lamp switch assembly. When the brake pedal is
pressed, 12 V is supplied to the TCM through connector C-96 pin 42.

When the TCM detects an open or short to ground on the stop lamp signal circuit during stopping then DTC P0724 sets.
DTC P0724 is a type C DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–56

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0719, P0722 or P0723.

• The vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h for 7 seconds, then 8 – 40 km/h for 5 seconds, then less than 8 km/h.

• Continuously eight times once the previous criteria have been met.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM detects an open or short to ground on the stop lamp switch signal circuit when the circuit should be high,
battery voltage.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM does not request the engine control module (ECM) to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM records this
information as a Failure Record.

• The TCM stores DTC P0724 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

Diagnostic Aids

• Verify the brake pedal position sensor is


adjusted properly, refer to 8B Cruise
Control.
• Test drive the vehicle if a switch or circuit
condition cannot be located. An
intermittent condition may be duplicated
during a test drive.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

3 Checks if the stop lamp switch is serviceable.

4 Checks if there is a stop lamp switch signal to the TCM.

DTC P0724 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Engine / V6 Engine / Data Display / Cruise / Traction Data.
Check for an
3 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.
intermittent fault in
4 Press the brake pedal. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does the Stop Lamp Pedal Switch parameter indicate Active? and Chassis Go to Step 3
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–57

Step Action Yes No

3 Test the stop lamp switch assembly, refer to 8B Cruise Control. Replace the stop
lamp switch
Is the stop lamp switch assembly serviceable? Go to Step 4 assembly

4 1 Disconnect connector C-96 from the TCM.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between


harness connector C-96 pin 42 and a known ground.
Repair or replace
3 Press the brake pedal. affected circuit

Does the multimeter display battery voltage? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6

5 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 6 —

6 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Operate the vehicle under the following conditions:

• Turn on the ignition, with the engine off for at least


2 seconds.

• Start the vehicle and idle for 5 seconds.

• Drive in D4 from 0 – 60 km/h then brake, eight times in one


ignition cycle.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0724 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 7

7 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.18 DTC P0741 – Torque Converter Clutch


System – Stuck Off

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0741 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System - Stuck Off.

Circuit Description
The torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid valve is a normally-open exhaust valve that is used with the torque converter
clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid valve to control fluid acting on the converter clutch apply valve. The
TCC solenoid valve attaches to the transmission case assembly extending into the pump cover. When grounded by the
transmission control module (TCM), the TCC solenoid valve stops converter signal oil from exhausting. This causes
converter signal oil pressure to increase and move the converter clutch apply valve against spring force and into the
apply position. In this position, release fluid is open to an exhaust port and converter feed fluid fills the apply fluid circuit.
The converter feed fluid applies the TCC. When the TCM no longer provides a ground path, the TCC solenoid valve de-
energizes and apply fluid exhausts, releasing the TCC.

When the TCM detects high torque converter slip when the TCC is commanded off, then DTC P0741 sets. DTC P0741 is
a type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–58

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0722, P0723, P0742, P2763 or P2764.

• The IMS range is D2, D3 or D4.

• Ignition voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The transmission fluid temperature is greater than 20°C.

• The engine torque is 108 – 881 Nm.

• The throttle position is greater than 10 percent.

• The gear ratio is within the following ranges:

• 1.41:1 – 1.56:1 — 2nd gear,

• 0.95:1 – 1.05:1 — 3rd gear.

• The TCC is commanded on 0.1 seconds.

• The TCC duty cycle is greater than 60 percent for more than 3 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM commands the TCC on, and the TCC slip is greater than 250 r.p.m. for 3 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive drive trip in which the conditions
for setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM inhibits TCC.

• The TCM inhibits 4th gear if the transmission is in Hot Mode.

• The TCM commands elevated line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0741 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the sixth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• Inspect the transmission fluid lines to the radiator. The lines may be pinched, blocked or twisted.

• Contamination may cause the TCC apply valve to stick in the valve body.

• Internal damage to the torque converter may prevent TCC application.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–59

2 This step tests the hydraulic state of the TCC. When the TCM commands the TCC solenoid valve off, the slip
speed should increase.

3 Checks the mechanical components that cause the DTC and their state.

DTC P0741 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

8 Drive the vehicle in the D4 drive range in second, third, or fourth


gear under steady acceleration, with a TP angle at 20%.
Refer to Diagnostic
On Tech 2, while TCC Solenoid status is On, is the TCC Slip Speed Aids within this
within -20 to +20 RPM? Section Go to Step 3

3 The TCC system is hydraulically stuck off. Inspect for the following
conditions:

• TCC PWM solenoid valve mechanically stuck in the off position


or leaking.

• TCC regulator apply valve stuck in the off position.

• TCC solenoid valve stuck in the off position or leaking.

• TCC enable valve stuck in the off position.

• Incorrectly aligned, damaged or leaking valve body gasket.

• Inspect the forward clutch input housing assembly for the input
shaft fluid seal ring leaking or worn.

Did you find and correct any of the above conditions? Go to Step 4 —
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–60

Step Action Yes No

4 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 with the TCC on and the throttle above
10%. Ensure Tech 2 displays TCC Slip Speed between -25 to
+25 RPM for 3 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0741 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.19 DTC P0742 – Torque Converter Clutch


System – Stuck On

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0742 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) System – Stuck On.

Circuit Description
The torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid valve is a normally-open exhaust valve that is used with the torque converter
clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid valve to control fluid acting on the converter clutch apply valve. The
TCC solenoid valve attaches to the transmission case assembly extending into the pump cover. When grounded by the
transmission control module (TCM), the TCC solenoid valve stops converter signal oil from exhausting. This causes
converter signal oil pressure to increase and move the converter clutch apply valve against spring force and into the
apply position. In this position, release fluid is open to an exhaust port and converter feed fluid fills the apply fluid circuit.
The converter feed fluid applies the TCC. When the TCM no longer provides a ground path, the TCC solenoid valve de-
energizes and apply fluid exhausts, releasing the TCC.

When the TCM detects low torque converter slip when the TCC is commanded off, then DTC P0742 sets. DTC P0742 is
a type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0722, P0723, P0741 P02763, P02764, P02769 or P02770.

• Ignition voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The IMS range is D4.

• The transmission fluid temperature is 10 – 130°C.

• The engine speed is 500 – 6,500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds, then 800 – 4,400 r.p.m.

• The engine torque is 156 – 881 Nm.

• The throttle position is greater than 10 percent.

• The transmission is not in 1st gear and the gear ratio is 0.95:1 – 1.56:1.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–61

• The vehicle speed is greater than 15 km/h.

• TCC is commanded off.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The following conditions occur four times in one ignition cycle:

• The TCM commands the TCC off.

• The TCC slip is -15 – +15 r.p.m. for greater than 3 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive drive trip in which the conditions
for setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0742 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the sixth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
The TCC fluid hydraulically applies the TCC, possibly causing an engine stall, under the following conditions:

• The TCC is hydraulically stuck in the on position

• The parking brake is applied.

• Any gear range is selected.

• Contamination may cause the TCC apply valve to intermittently stick in the valve body.

• Internal damage in the torque converter may cause no TCC apply.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 This step tests the hydraulic state of the TCC. When the TCM commands the TCC solenoid valve off, the slip
speed should increase.

3 Checks the mechanical components that cause the DTC and their state.

DTC P0742 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–62

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

8 Drive the vehicle in the D4 drive range in second, third, or fourth


gear under steady acceleration, with a TP angle at 10%.
Refer to Diagnostic
On Tech 2, while TCC Solenoid status is On, is the TCC Slip Speed Aids within this
within -20 to +20 RPM? Go to Step 3 Section

3 The TCC is hydraulically stuck ON. Inspect for the following:

• Blocked exhaust orifice in the TCC solenoid valve.

• Converter clutch apply valve stuck in the apply position.

• Incorrectly aligned or damaged valve body gasket.

• Restricted release passage.

• Restricted transmission cooler line.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 4 —

4 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 with the TCC ON and the throttle above
10%. Ensure Tech 2 displays TCC Slip Speed between 100 –
2,500 RPM for 3 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0742 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–63

4.20 DTC P0751 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve


Performance – No First or Fourth Gear

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0751 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance – No First or Fourth Gear.

Circuit Description
The 1-2 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 1-2 and 3-4 shift valves. The 1-2 SS valve is a
normally-open exhaust valve that is used with the 2-3 SS valve, to allow four different shifting combinations.

If the transmission control module (TCM) detects a 2-2-3-3 shift pattern, then DTC P0751 sets. DTC P0751 is a type B
DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0722, P0723, P0742, P0894, P0973, P0974, P0976, P0977 or P1815.

• Ignition voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine r.p.m. is 500 – 6,500 r.p.m. for greater than 5 seconds.

• The transmission fluid temperature is 20 – 130°C.

• The throttle position is greater than 10 percent.

• The input shaft speed is 200 – 6,800 r.p.m.

• The output shaft speed is greater than 100 r.p.m.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


Both of the following conditions must occur twice during the same trip:

• Fail Case 1: The TCM commands 1st gear and the resulting gear ratio is 1.44:1 – 1.50:1 for 2 seconds.

• Fail Case 2: The TCM commands 4th gear and the resulting gear ratio is 0.98:1 – 1.03:1 for 4 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the Conditions for
Setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0751 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–64

Diagnostic Aids
• If you clear DTC P0751, and then cannot reset DTC P0751, the following conditions may exist:

• Fluid contamination,

• Blocked fluid circuits, or

• Restricted fluid circuits.

• Refer to 5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 This step tests the TCM commanded all shifts, all shift solenoid valves responded correctly, and if all the shifts did
not occur.

3 Checks the mechanical components that cause the DTC and their state.

DTC P0751 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions:

• Accelerate the vehicle

• Ensure the TCM commands 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. Refer to Diagnostic
Aids within this
Did you detect a 2-2-3-3 shift pattern? Go to Step 3 Section

3 Inspect the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for the following conditions:

• An internal malfunction.

• Damaged seals on the shift solenoid valve. Perform the shift


solenoid leak test, refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E
– Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 4 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–65

Step Action Yes No

4 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions,


only if traffic and road conditions permit:

• Hold the throttle at 20%, and

• Accelerate to 88 km/h.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0751 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.21 DTC P0752 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve


Performance – No Second or Third Gear

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0752 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance – No Second or Third Gear.

Circuit Description
The 1-2 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 1-2 and 3-4 shift valves. The 1-2 SS valve is a
normally-open exhaust valve that is used with the 2-3 SS valve, to allow four different shifting combinations.

When the transmission control module (TCM) detects a 1-1-4-4 shift pattern, then DTC P0752 sets. DTC P0752 is a
type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0722, P0723, P0742, P0894, P0973, P0974, P0976, or P0977.

• Ignition voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The transmission fluid temperature is 20 – 130°C.

• The throttle position is greater than 10 percent.

• The output shaft speed is greater than 150 r.p.m.

• The engine torque is 108 – 882 Nm.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM commands 2nd gear and the resulting gear ratio is 2.42:1 – 2.52:1, 1st gear ratio for 2 seconds twice during
the same trip.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–66

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the Conditions for
Setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits 3-2 downshifts if the vehicle speed is greater than 40 km/h.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0752 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• If you clear DTC P0752, and then cannot reset DTC P0752, the following conditions may exist:

• Fluid contamination,

• Blocked fluid circuits, or

• Restricted fluid circuits.

• Refer to 5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 This step tests the TCM commanded all shifts, all shift solenoid valves responded correctly, and if all the shifts did
not occur.

3 Checks the mechanical components that cause the DTC and their state.

DTC P0752 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–67

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions:

• Accelerate the vehicle, and

• Ensure the TCM commands 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. Refer to Diagnostic
Aids within this
Did you detect a 1-1-4-4 shift pattern? Go to Step 3 Section

3 Inspect the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for the following conditions:

• An internal malfunction.

• Damaged seals on the shift solenoid valve. Perform the shift


solenoid leak test, refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E
– Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 4 —

4 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions,


only if traffic and road conditions permit:

• Hold the throttle at 20%, and

• Accelerate to 88 km/h.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0752 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–68

4.22 DTC P0756 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve


Performance – No First or Second Gear

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0756 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance – No First or Second Gear.

Circuit Description
The 2-3 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 2-3 shift valves. The 2-3 SS valve is a normally-
open exhaust valve that is used with the 1-2 SS valve, to allow four different shifting combinations.

When the transmission control module (TCM) detects a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern, then DTC P0756 sets. DTC P0756 is a
type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0120, P0722, P0723, P0742, P0973, P0974, P0976, P0977 or P1815.

• The engine torque is 108 – 882 Nm.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The transmission fluid temperature is 20 – 130°C.

• The throttle position is greater than 10 percent.

• The output shaft speed is greater than 150 r.p.m.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


Both of the following conditions must occur twice during the same trip:

• Fail Case 1: The TCM commands 1st gear when the output shaft speed is 200 r.p.m. or greater, the engine torque
is 40 – 350 Nm, and the resulting gear ratio is 0.73:1 – 0.77:1 for 2.8 seconds.

• Fail Case 2: The TCM commands 2nd gear when the engine torque is 36 – 350 Nm and the resulting gear ratio is
1.56:1 – 1.64:1 for 1 second.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM inhibits 1st gear.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0756 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–69

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• If you clear DTC P0756, and then cannot reset DTC P0756, the following conditions may exist:

• Fluid contamination,

• Blocked fluid circuits, or

• Restricted fluid circuits.

• Refer to 5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 This step tests the TCM commanded all shifts, all shift solenoid valves responded correctly, and if all the shifts did
not occur.

3 Checks the mechanical components that cause the DTC and their state.

DTC P0756 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions:

• Accelerate the vehicle, and

• Ensure the TCM commands 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. Refer to Diagnostic
Aids within this
Did you detect a 4-3-3-4 shift pattern? Go to Step 3 Section
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–70

Step Action Yes No

3 1 Inspect the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for the following


conditions:

• Debris or chips in the AFL oil passage.

• Debris or chips restricting oil flow in passage #29 of the


case or through the spacer plate gasket into the valve
body.

• A cracked 2-3 shift solenoid.

• A 2-3 shift valve which is stuck or hung up in the valve


body bore.

• A 2-3 shuttle valve which is stuck or hung up in its bore.

• Damaged seals on the shift solenoid valves. Perform the


shift solenoid leak test, refer to 7C3 Automatic
Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and Mechanical
Diagnosis.

2 Clean and inspect the related valves, bores and the valve body
for debris or contamination.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 4 —

4 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions,


only if traffic and road conditions permit:

• Hold the throttle at 40%, and

• Accelerate to 64 km/h.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0756 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.23 DTC P0757 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve


Performance – No Third or Fourth Gear

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0757 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Valve Performance – No Third or Fourth Gear.

Circuit Description
The 2-3 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 2-3 shift valves. The 2-3 SS valve is a normally-
open exhaust valve that is used with the 1-2 SS valve to allow four different shifting combinations.

When the transmission control module (TCM) detects a 1-2-2-1 shift pattern, then DTC P0757 sets. DTC P0757 is a
type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–71

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0120, P0722, P0723, P0742, P0973, P0974, P0976, P0977 or P1815.

• The engine torque is 108 – 882 Nm.

• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The transmission fluid temperature is 20 – 130°C.

• The throttle position is greater than 10 percent.

• The output shaft speed is greater than 150 r.p.m.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM commands 3rd gear and the resulting gear ratio is a 1.44:1 – 1.52:1, 1st gear, for 2.25 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits 4th gear.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0757 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• If you clear DTC P0757, and then cannot reset DTC P0757, the following conditions may exist:

• Fluid contamination,

• Blocked fluid circuits, or

• Restricted fluid circuits.

• Refer to 5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear Ratio.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 This step tests the TCM commanded all shifts, all shift solenoid valves responded correctly, and if all the shifts did
not occur.

3 Checks the mechanical components that cause the DTC and their state.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–72

DTC P0757 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions:

• Accelerate the vehicle, and

• Ensure the TCM commands 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. Refer to Diagnostic
Aids within this
Did you detect a 1-2-2-1 shift pattern? Go to Step 3 Section

3 Inspect the shift solenoid/hydraulic circuit for the following conditions:

• An internal malfunction

• Damaged seals on the shift solenoid valve. Perform the shift


solenoid leak test, refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E
– Hydraulic and Mechanical Diagnosis.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 4 —

4 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Drive the vehicle in D4 range under the following conditions,


only if traffic and road conditions permit:

• Hold the throttle at 15%, and

• Accelerate to 80 km/h.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0757 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 5


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–73

Step Action Yes No

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.24 DTC P0787 – 3-2 Shift Solenoid Control


Circuit Low Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports the following DTC:

DTC P0787 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit Low Voltage.

Circuit Description
The 3-2 shift solenoid (SS) valve is a normally-closed, 3-port, on/off device that controls the 3-2 downshift. The solenoid
attaches to the control valve body within the transmission. The solenoid receives ignition voltage through the ignition
circuit. The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing a ground path on the 3-2 shift solenoid
valve control circuit. During a 3-2 downshift, the 2-4 band applies as the 3-4 clutch releases. The TCM varies the timing
between the 3-4 clutch release and the 2-4 band apply depending on the vehicle speed and the throttle position.

When the TCM detects a continuous open or short to ground in the 3-2 SS valve circuit, then DTC P0787 sets.
DTC P0787 is a type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 10 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is greater than 450 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

• Vehicle speed is less than 200 km/h.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The TCM commands the solenoid off and the voltage feedback remains low, 0 V.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM commands 3rd gear.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0787 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–74

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

4 Checks the ability of the TCM to control the solenoid.

5 Checks for supply voltage to the 3-2 SS valve.

6 Checks the ability of the TCM and wiring to control the ground circuit.

8 Checks the resistance of the control valve body wiring harness and the 3-2 SS valve.

9 Checks if the 3-2 SS or control valve body wiring harness is shorted to the transmission housing.

13 Checks if the control valve body wiring harness is shorted to ground.

14 Checks if any of the other solenoids in the transmission are shorted to ground.

DTC P0787 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

Are any of the following DTCs also set?

• P0961

• P0973

• P0976

• P2764

• P2769. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 Inspect fuse C-8 and check if it is blown, refer to 8A Electrical-Body


and Chassis. Replace the fuse

Is the fuse blown? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 5


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–75

Step Action Yes No

4 1 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous Tests / 3-2
Downshift Solenoid.
Check for an
2 With Tech 2 command the 3-2 shift solenoid ON and OFF. intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
Does Tech 2 display the 3-2 Downshift Solenoid as Active and 8A Electrical-Body
Inactive respectively? and Chassis Go to Step 5

5 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the Test between
harness connector E-95. E-95 pin 10 and
C-107 pin 9 for an
4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off. open circuit

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 10 and a Repalce affected
known ground. circuit

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 18

6 1 Using a test lamp, probe connector E-95 pin 10 with the ground
lead to connector E-95 pin 11.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous Tests / 3-2
Downshift Solenoid.

3 With Tech 2 command the 3-2 shift solenoid ON and OFF three
times.

Does the test lamp turn on and off with each command? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Is the test lamp always illuminates? Go to Step 15 Go to Step 16

8 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the harness connector E-95 and
install on to the transmission connector E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 11.

Does the multimeter display 20 – 32 Ω? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10

9 1 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between:

• Transmission connector E-95 pin 10 and a known ground. Check for an


intermittent fault in
• Transmission connector E-95 pin 11 and a known ground. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does the multimeter display greater than 250 kΩ in both instances? and Chassis Go to Step 11

10 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the 3-2 SS and the control valve body wiring
Replace the control
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-
valve body wiring Replace the 3-2 SS,
vehicle Servicing.
harness, refer to refer to
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the 3-2 SS. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
3-2 SS pins. Servicing. Servicing.

Does the multimeter display 20 – 32 Ω? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 18


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–76

Step Action Yes No

11 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the 3-2 SS and the control valve body wiring
Replace the control
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-
valve body wiring Replace the 3-2
vehicle Servicing.
harness, refer to shift solenoid, refer
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the 3-2 SS. 7C4 Automatic to 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
each of the 3-2 SS pins and the transmission case. Servicing. Servicing.

Does the multimeter display 250 kΩ in both instances? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 18

12 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 13

13 1 Gain access to the control valve body wiring harness, refer to Replace the control
7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. valve body wiring
harness, refer to
2 Test for a short to ground in the control valve body wiring 7C4 Automatic
harness. Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
Did you find a short to ground condition?
Servicing.

Go to Step 18 Go to Step 14

14 1 Test each solenoid in the transmission for a short to ground,


refer to 8A Electrical-Body and Chassis.

2 Replace the faulty solenoid as necessary.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 18 —

15 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 11 and C-96 pin 14 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 17

16 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 11 and C-96 pin 14 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 18 Go to Step 17

17 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 18 —

18 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D3 or D4 and perform a 3-2 downshift.


Ensure the 3-2 Downshift Solenoid parameter displays On
when the shift occurs.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0787 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 19

19 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–77

Step Action Yes No

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.25 DTC P0788 – 3-2 Shift Solenoid Control


Circuit High Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0788 3-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit High Voltage.

Circuit Description
The 3-2 shift solenoid (SS) valve is a normally-closed, 3-port, on/off device that controls the 3-2 downshift. The solenoid
attaches to the control valve body within the transmission. The solenoid receives ignition voltage through the ignition 1
circuit. The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing a ground path on the 3-2 shift solenoid
valve control circuit. During a 3-2 downshift, the 2-4 band applies as the 3-4 clutch releases. The TCM varies the timing
between the 3-4 clutch release and the 2-4 band apply depending on the vehicle speed and the throttle position.

When the TCM detects a continuous short to voltage in the 3-2 shift solenoid valve control circuit, then DTC P0788 sets.
DTC P0788 is a type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 10 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is 450 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

• The engine is not in fuel cut off.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P0788 sets if the TCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage feedback remains high, battery voltage.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the Conditions for
Setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM commands 3rd gear.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0788 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–78

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks for a short to voltage in the 3-2 SS signal circuit.

3 Checks for the serviceability of the 3-2 SS.

DTC P0788 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Turn off the ignition.

8 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set

9 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

10 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

11 Using a test lamp and Tool No. J 35616-C, probe between


connector E-95 pin 11 and a known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 3

3 1 Install Tool No. J 44152 to the transmission connector E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 11.

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 6


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–79

Step Action Yes No

4 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the 3-2 SS and the control valve body wiring
Replace the control
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-
Replace the 3-2 SS, valve body wiring
vehicle Servicing.
refer to harness, refer to
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the 3-2 SS. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
3-2 SS pins. Servicing Servicing.

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 7

5 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 11 and C-96 pin 14 for a
short to voltage.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6

6 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 7 —

7 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D3 or D4 and perform a 3-2 downshift.


Ensure the 3-2 Downshift Solenoid parameter displays On
when the shift occurs and Off in all other instances

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0787 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 8

8 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.26 DTC P0894 – Transmission Component


Slipping

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0894 Transmission Component Slipping.

Circuit Description
The transmission control module (TCM) monitors the difference between engine speed and transmission output speed.
In D3 drive range with the TCC engaged, the engine speed should closely match the transmission output speed. In D4
drive range, with the TCC engaged, the TCC slip speed should be -20 to +50 r.p.m.

When the TCM detects excessive TCC slip when the TCC should be engaged, then DTC P0894 sets. DTC P0894 is a
type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–80

Conditions for Running the DTC


• No DTCs P0122, P0123, P0722, P0723, P0741, P0742, P0751, P0752, P0756, P0757, P0973, P0974, P1810,
P1815, P1816, P2763 or P2764.

• The engine speed is greater than 450 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

• The engine is not in fuel cut-off.

• The engine torque is 108 Nm – 882 Nm.

• The vehicle speed is 48 – 177 km/h.

• The engine speed is 1,200 – 3,750 r.p.m.

• The speed ratio is 0.70 – 2.25, speed ratio is engine speed divided by the transmission output speed.

• The gear range is D4.

• The commanded gear is not 1st gear.

• The TFT is 20 – 130°C.

• The shift solenoid performance diagnostic counters are zero.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P0894 sets if the following conditions occur for three TCC cycles.

• The TCC is commanded on for 5 seconds.

• The throttle position is greater than 10 percent.

• The TCC slip speed is 100 – 550 r.p.m. for 10 seconds.

NOTE
The following actions may occur before the DTC
sets, if the:
• TCC is commanded on for 10 seconds, and
• the TCC is at 75 percent duty cycle for
5 seconds, and
• the TP angle is 10 – 99 percent, and
• the transmission slip counter has incremented
to either 1 or 2, out of 3 to increment the fail
counter for the current ignition cycle,
then the following slip conditions and actions may
increment the fail counter for the current ignition
cycle. These conditions must occur sequentially.

Condition 1
If the TCC slip speed is 100 – 550 r.p.m. for 10 seconds, then the TCM will command maximum line pressure and freeze
shift adapts from being updated.

Condition 2
If Condition 1 is met and the TCC slip speed is 100 – 550 r.p.m. for 10 seconds, then the TCM will command the TCC off
for 1.5 seconds.

Condition 3
If Condition 2 is met and the TCC slip speed is 100 – 550 r.p.m. for 10 seconds, then the fail counter on the current
ignition cycle is incremented.

The above slip conditions and actions may be disregarded if the TCC is commanded off at any time, because of a driving
manoeuvre, sudden acceleration or deceleration.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–81

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC.

• The TCM inhibits 4th gear if in hot mode.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0894 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• Bronze material found in the transmission oil pan may indicate stator shaft bushing wear. If bushing wear is
suspected, inspect the stator shaft and the input, turbine, shaft for damage.

• Perform the Torque Converter Diagnosis Procedure, refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and
Mechanical Diagnosis.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

3 Checks the torque converter for slippage while in a commanded lock-up state.

4-12 Checks the mechanical components that cause the DTC and their state.

13 When the TAP cells are cleared the TCM needs to relearn the TAP cells for the transmission. As such, when the
vehicle is first driven, the shifts may be harsh. The transmission shifts should become smoother the more the
vehicle is driven until the TCM has relearned all TAP cells.

DTC P0894 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 Inspect for correct transmission fluid level, refer to 7C4 Automatic Check the
Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. transmission fluid
level, refer to
Did you perform the fluid checking procedure? 7C4 Automatic
Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
Go to Step 3 Servicing
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–82

Step Action Yes No

3 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

NOTE
It may be necessary to allow multiple TCC cycles to occur
to verify a slipping condition. It may also be necessary to
ensure the transmission is warm before performing this
step.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

8 Drive the vehicle in 4th gear with the TCC commanded on.
Refer to Diagnostic
On Tech 2, while TCC Solenoid status is On, is the TCC Slip Speed Aids within this
within 130 – 800 RPM for 7 seconds? Go to Step 4 Section

4 1 Inspect the torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid valve for the
following conditions:

• internal malfunction, such as sediment or damage, and

• damaged seals, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

2 Inspect the torque converter clutch pulse width modulation


(TCC PWM) solenoid valve for the following conditions:

• internal malfunction, such as sediment or damage, and

• damaged seals, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 5


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–83

Step Action Yes No

5 1 Inspect the 1-2 shift solenoid (SS) valve for the following
conditions:

• internal malfunction, such as sediment or damage, and

• damaged seals, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

2 Inspect the 2-3 shift solenoid (SS) valve for the following
conditions:

• internal malfunction, such as sediment or damage, and

• damaged seals, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

3 Inspect the 3-2 shift solenoid valve assembly for the following
conditions:

• internal malfunction, such as sediment or damage, and

• damaged seals, 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 14 Go to Step 6

6 Inspect the valve body assembly for the following conditions:

• stuck regulator apply valve, and

• scored regulator apply valve body, refer to 7C5 Automatic


Transmission – 4L60E – Unit Repair.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 7

7 Inspect the torque converter assembly for the following conditions:

• front stator shaft bushing for wear,

• stator roller clutch not holding, and

• external damage/leaks, refer to 7C5 Automatic Transmission –


4L60E – Unit Repair.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 8

8 Inspect the oil pump assembly for the following conditions:

• a stuck converter clutch valve,

• the converter clutch valve is assembled backwards,

• a incorrectly position converter clutch valve retaining ring,

• a cocked converter clutch outer valve spring,

• a incorrectly positioned pump to case gasket,

• restricted orifice cup plugs,

• damaged orifice cup plugs, and

• over-tightened, or unevenly tightened pump body to cover bolts,


refer to 7C5 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Unit Repair.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 9


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–84

Step Action Yes No

9 Inspect the input housing and shaft assembly for the following
conditions:

• cut turbine shaft O-ring seal,

• damaged turbine shaft O-ring seal,

• restricted turbine shaft retainer and ball assembly, and

• damaged turbine shaft retainer and ball assembly, refer to 7C5


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Unit Repair.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 10

10 1 Inspect the 2-4 band assembly for the following conditions:

• worn 2-4 band,

• damaged 2-4 band,

• incorrectly positioned 2-4 band,

• incorrectly assembled 2-4 band, and

• the band anchor pin is not engaged, refer to 7C5


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Unit Repair.

2 Inspect the 2-4 servo assembly for the following conditions:

• restricted apply passages in the 2-4 servo assembly,

• blocked apply passages in the 2-4 servo assembly,

• nicks or burrs on the 2nd apply piston pin,

• damaged 2nd apply piston pin,

• incorrect 2nd apply piston pin,

• nicks or burrs on the pin bore in the case,

• damaged fourth servo piston,

• incorrectly assembled fourth servo piston,

• damaged servo bore in the case,

• missing piston seals,

• cut piston seals,

• damaged piston seals,

• porosity in the pistons,

• porosity in the cover,

• porosity in the case,

• damaged piston seal grooves,

• plugged orifice cup plug, and

• missing orifice cup plug, refer to 7C5 Automatic


Transmission – 4L60E – Unit Repair.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 11


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–85

Step Action Yes No

11 Inspect the forward clutch assembly for the following conditions:

• worn clutch plates,

• porosity in the forward clutch piston,

• damaged forward clutch piston,

• missing forward clutch piston inner and outer seals,

• cut forward clutch piston inner and outer seals,

• damaged forward clutch piston inner and outer seals,

• missing input housing to forward clutch housing O-ring seal,

• cut input housing to forward clutch housing O-ring seal,

• damaged input housing to forward clutch housing O-ring seal,

• damaged forward clutch housing,

• damaged forward clutch housing retainer and ball assembly, and

• forward clutch housing retainer and ball assembly is not sealing,


refer to 7C5 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Unit Repair.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 12

12 Inspect the 3-4 clutch assembly for the following conditions:

• worn clutch plates,

• porosity in the 3-4 clutch piston,

• damaged 3-4 clutch piston,

• missing 3-4 clutch inner and outer seals,

• cut 3-4 clutch inner and outer seals,

• damaged 3-4 clutch inner and outer seals,

• damaged 3-4 clutch spring assembly,

• damaged 3-4 clutch apply ring,

• damaged piston seal grooves,

• blocked orifice cup plug, and


Check for an
• missing orifice cup plug, refer to 7C5 Automatic Transmission – intermittent fault in
4L60E – Unit Repair. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 13 and Chassis

13 1 Change the transmission fluid and filter.

2 Inspect for correct transmission fluid level, refer to


7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.

3 Add new fluid as necessary.

NOTE
The Clear TAPS function will clear all adapt cells. This may
affect transmission performance. The TCM will update the
transmission adapt cell values as the vehicle is driven.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Programming / Reset TAP Cells
and follow Tech 2 instructions.

Did you complete the above procedure? Go to Step 14 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–86

Step Action Yes No

14 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Data Display / Transmission Data.

4 Operate the vehicle under the following conditions:

• Drive the vehicle in D4, with the TCC on, and a throttle
position at 20%.

• On Tech 2 ensure the TCC Slip Speed is -20 to +50 RPM


for at least 7 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0894 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 15

15 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.27 DTC P0961 – Line Pressure Control


Solenoid System Performance

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0961 Line Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid System Performance.

Circuit Description
The pressure control (PC) solenoid valve is an electronic device that regulates transmission line pressure based on the
current flow through its coil winding. The magnetic field produced by the coil moves the solenoid's internal valve, which
varies pressure to the pressure regulator valve. The transmission control module (TCM) controls the PC solenoid valve
by applying a varying amount of current to the solenoid. The applied current can vary from 0.1 – 1.1 A. Low current,
0.1 A, indicates high line pressure. High current, 1.1 A, indicates low line pressure. The duty cycle of the PC solenoid
valve is expressed as a percentage of energised on time. Zero percent indicates zero on time, non-energised, or no
current flow. Approximately 60 percent at idle indicates maximum on time, energised, or high current flow. The TCM
determines the appropriate line pressure for a given load by comparing the throttle position, the engine speed and other
inputs.

When the TCM detects a continuous open or short to ground in the PC solenoid valve circuit, then DTC P0961 sets.
DTC P0961 is a type C DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine is running.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The PC solenoid valve duty cycle reaches its high limit, approximately 95 percent, or low limit, approximately 2 percent.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM does not request the engine control module (ECM) to illuminate the MIL.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–87

• The TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are met. The TCM records this
information as a Failure Record.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM stores DTC P0961 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

Diagnostic Aids
DTC P0961 may set under low voltage conditions caused by high electrical system demands.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks the ability of the TCM to control the solenoid.

3 Checks the resistance of the control valve body wiring harness and the PC solenoid.

5 Checks the serviceability of the PC solenoid circuits contained in the control valve body wiring harness.

6-8 Checks the serviceability the power and signal circuits between the TCM and the transmission.

DTC P0961 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–88

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Miscellaneous Tests / Pressure Control Solenoid.

8 Using Tech 2, turn the pressure control solenoid on and off three Check for an
times. intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
Does Tech 2 display the PCS as On and Off when commanded by 8A Electrical-Body
Tech 2? and Chassis Go to Step 3

3 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


transmission connector E-95.

4 Using the multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 1 and 2.

Does the multimeter display 3 – 7 Ω? Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5

4 Using the multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector E-95 pin 2 and the transmission case.

Does the multimeter display greater than 250 kΩ? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 5

5 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 1 & E-95 pin 2 and the
Replace the control
solenoid for the following:
valve body wiring Replace the PC
• open circuit, harness, refer to solenoid valve, refer
7C4 Automatic to 7C4 Automatic
• short together, and Transmission – Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
• short to ground. Servicing. Servicing

Did you find any of the conditions tested? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 11

6 1 Disconnect Tool No. J 44152 from connector E-95.

2 Connect E-95 to the transmission.

3 Disconnect connector E-95 from the TCM.

4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector C-96 pins 17 and 40.

Does the multimeter display 3 – 7 Ω? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 8


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–89

Step Action Yes No

7 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between


connector C-96 pin 40 and a known ground.

Does the multimeter display greater than 250 kΩ? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 8

8 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 2 & C-96 pin 40 and
E-95 pin 1 & C-96 pin 17 for the following:

• open circuit,

• short together, and


Repair or replace
• short to ground. the affected circuit

Did you find any of the conditions tested? Go to Step 11 —

9 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 1 & E-95 pin 2 and the
solenoid for a short to voltage.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 11 Go to Step 10

10 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 11 —

11 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / Pressure Control Solenoid Data.

4 Start the engine and ensure the difference on Tech 2 between


the PCS Actual Current and the PCS Desired Current is less
than 16 mA.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0961 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 20

12 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.28 DTC P0973 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Control


Circuit Low Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0973 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit Low Voltage.

Circuit Description
The 1-2 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 1-2 and 3-4 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally-
open exhaust valve. With the 2-3 SS valve, the 1-2 SS valve allows four different shifting combinations. The solenoid
attaches to the control valve body within the transmission. The 1-2 SS valve receives ignition voltage through the ignition
voltage circuit. The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing the ground path on the 1-2 SS
valve control circuit.

When the TCM detects a continuous open or short to ground in the 1-2 SS valve circuit, then DTC P0973 sets.
DTC P0973 is a type B DTC.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–90

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The 1-2 SS is commanded on.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P0973 sets when either of the following conditions occurs for 4.3 seconds:

• The TCM detects an open in the 1-2 shift solenoid valve circuit when the 1-2 SS is commanded on.

• The TCM detects a short to ground in the 1-2 shift solenoid valve circuit when the 1-2 SS is commanded on.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive drive trip in which the conditions
for setting the DTC are met.

• The TCC commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM inhibits 3-2 shift if vehicle speed is less than 40 km/h.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0973 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without an emission related
diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

4 Checks the ability of the TCM to control the solenoid.

5 Checks for supply voltage to the 1-2 SS valve.

6 Checks the ability of the TCM and wiring to control the ground circuit.

8 Checks the resistance of the control valve body wiring harness and the 1-2 SS valve.

9 Checks if the 1-2 SS or control valve body wiring harness is shorted to the transmission housing.

13 Checks if the control valve body wiring harness is shorted to ground.

14 Checks if any of the other solenoids in the transmission are shorted to ground.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–91

DTC P0973 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

Are any of the following DTCs also set?

• P0787

• P0976

• P2764

• P2769. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 Inspect fuse C-8 and check if it is blown, refer to 8A Electrical-Body


and Chassis. Replace the fuse

Is the fuse blown? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 5

4 1 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous
Tests / Shift Solenoid A.

2 With Tech 2 command the shift solenoid A ON and OFF.


Check for an
3 On Tech 2 select: intermittent fault in
Data Display / 1-2 Shift Data. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does Tech 2 display the Shift Solenoid A Circuit as Okay? and Chassis Go to Step 5

5 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set.

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 10 and a


known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 15


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–92

Step Action Yes No

6 1 Using a test lamp, probe connector E-95 pin 10 with the ground
lead to connector E-95 pin 4.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous Tests / Shift
Solenoid A.

3 With Tech 2 command the shift solenoid A On and Off three


times.

Does the test lamp turn on and off with each command? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Is the test lamp always illuminated? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17

8 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the harness connector


E-95 and install on to the transmission connector
E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 4.

Does the multimeter display 19 – 31 Ω? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between:

• Transmission connector E-95 pin 10 and a known ground. Check for an


intermittent fault in
• Transmission connector E-95 pin 4 and a known ground. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does the multimeter display greater than 250 kΩ in both instances? and Chassis Go to Step 11

10 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the 1-2 SS and the control valve body wiring
Replace the control
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-
valve body wiring Replace the 1-2 SS,
vehicle Servicing.
harness, refer to refer to
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the 1-2 SS. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
1-2 SS pins. Servicing Servicing.

Does the multimeter display 19 – 31 Ω? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 19

11 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.


Replace the control
2 Gain access to the 1-2 SS and the control valve body wiring valve body wiring Replace the 1-2 SS,
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – harness, refer to refer to
On-vehicle Servicing. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
each of the 1-2 SS pins and a known ground. Servicing Servicing.

Does the multimeter display 250 kΩ in both instances? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 19

12 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 13

13 1 Gain access to the control valve body wiring harness, refer to Replace the control
7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. valve body wiring
harness, refer to
2 Test for a short to ground in the control valve body wiring 7C4 Automatic
harness. Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
Did you find a short to ground condition?
Servicing

Go to Step 19 Go to Step 14
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–93

Step Action Yes No

14 1 Test each solenoid for a short to ground.

2 Replace the faulty solenoid as necessary.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 19 —

15 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 —

16 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 4 and C-96 pin 2 for a short
to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 18

17 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 4 and C-96 pin 2 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 18

18 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 19 —

19 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / 1-2 Shift Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 and ensure the following conditions are


met::

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid A On and the


Shift Solenoid A Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid A Off and the


Shift Solenoid A Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• All conditions are met for 5 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0973 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 20

20 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.29 DTC P0974 – 1-2 Shift Solenoid Control


Circuit High Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0974 1-2 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit High Voltage.

Circuit Description
The 1-2 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 1-2 and 3-4 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally-
open exhaust valve. With the 2-3 SS valve, the 1-2 SS valve allows four different shifting combinations. The solenoid
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–94

attaches to the control valve body within the transmission. The 1-2 SS valve receives ignition voltage through the ignition
voltage circuit. The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing the ground path on the 1-2 SS
valve control circuit.

When the TCM detects a continuous short to voltage in the 1-2 shift solenoid valve control circuit, then DTC P0974 sets.
DTC P0974 is a type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is 500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P0974 sets if the TCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage feedback remains high, battery voltage.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the Conditions for
Setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0974 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks the ability of the TCM to command the 1-2 SS valve.

3 Checks for a short to voltage in the 1-2 SS signal circuit.

4 Checks the serviceability of the 1-2 SS and the control valve body wiring harness.

DTC P0974 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–95

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous
Tests / Shift Solenoid A.

8 With Tech 2 command the shift solenoid A ON and OFF.


Check for an
9 On Tech 2 select: intermittent fault in
Data Display / 1-2 Shift Data. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does Tech 2 display the Shift Solenoid A Circuit as Okay? and Chassis Go to Step 3

3 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 4 and a


known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate?. Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4

4 1 Install Tool No. J44152 on to the transmission connector E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 4 and 10.

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7

5 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the 1-2 SS and the control valve body wiring
Replace the control
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-
Replace the 1-2 SS, valve body wiring
vehicle Servicing.
refer to harness, refer to
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the 1-2 SS. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
1-2 SS pins. Servicing. Servicing

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 8


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–96

Step Action Yes No

6 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 4 and C-96 pin 2 for a short
to voltage.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 8 —

8 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / 1-2 Shift Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 and ensure the following conditions are


met::

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid A On and the


Shift Solenoid A Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid A Off and the


Shift Solenoid A Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• All conditions are met for 5 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0974 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9

9 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.30 DTC P0976 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Control


Circuit Low Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0976 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit Low Voltage.

Circuit Description
The 2-3 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 2-3 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally-open
exhaust valve. With the 1-2 SS valve, the 2-3 SS valve allows four different shifting combinations. The solenoid attaches
to the control valve body within the transmission. The 2-3 SS valve receives voltage through the ignition voltage circuit.
The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing the ground path on the 2-3 SS valve control
circuit.

When the TCM detects a continuous open or short to ground in the 2-3 SS valve control circuit, then DTC P0976 sets.
DTC P0976 is a type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The engine run time is greater than 5 seconds.

• The 2-3 SS is commanded on.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–97

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P0976 sets when either of the following conditions occurs for 4.3 seconds:

• The TCM detects an open in the 2-3 shift solenoid valve circuit when the 2-3 SS is commanded on.

• The TCM detects a short to ground in the 2-3 shift solenoid valve circuit when the 2-3 SS is commanded on.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL.

• The TCC commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM inhibits 3-2 shift if vehicle speed is less than 40 km/h.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0976 in TCM history.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without an emission related
diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

4 Checks the ability of the TCM to control the solenoid.

5 Checks for supply voltage to the 2-3 SS valve.

6 Checks the ability of the TCM and wiring to control the ground circuit.

8 Checks the resistance of the control valve body wiring harness and the 2-3 SS valve.

9 Checks if the 2-3 SS or control valve body wiring harness is shorted to the transmission housing.

13 Checks if the control valve body wiring harness is shorted to ground.

14 Checks whether any of the other solenoids in the transmission are shorted to ground.

DTC P0976 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–98

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

Are any of the following DTCs also set?

• P0787

• P0973

• P2764

• P2769. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 Inspect fuse C-8 and check if it is blown, refer to 8A Electrical-Body


and Chassis. Replace the fuse

Is the fuse blown? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 5

4 1 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous
Tests / Shift Solenoid B.

2 With Tech 2 command the shift solenoid B ON and OFF three


times.
Check for an
3 On Tech 2 select: intermittent fault in
Data Display / 2-3 Shift Data. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does Tech 2 display the Shift Solenoid B Circuit as Okay? and Chassis Go to Step 5

5 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set.

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 10 and a


known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 15


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–99

Step Action Yes No

6 1 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 10 with


the ground lead to connector E-95 pin 3.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous Tests / Shift
Solenoid B.

3 With Tech 2 command the shift solenoid B On and Off three


times.

Does the test lamp turn on and off with each command? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Is the test lamp always illuminated? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17

8 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the harness connector


E-95 and install on to the transmission connector E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 3.

Does the multimeter display 19 – 31 Ω? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between:

• Transmission connector E-95 pin 10 and a known ground. Check for an


intermittent fault in
• Transmission connector E-95 pin 3 and a known ground. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does the multimeter display greater than 250 kΩ in both instances? and Chassis Go to Step 11

10 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the 2-3 SS and the control valve body wiring
Replace the control
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –
valve body wiring Replace the 2-3 SS,
On-vehicle Servicing.
harness, refer to refer to
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the 2-3 SS. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
2-3 SS pins. Servicing Servicing

Does the multimeter display 19 – 31 Ω? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 19

11 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.


Replace the control
2 Gain access to the 2-3 SS and the control valve body wiring valve body wiring Replace the 2-3 SS,
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – harness, refer to refer to
On-vehicle Servicing. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
each of the 2-3 SS pins and a known ground. Servicing Servicing

Does the multimeter display 250 kΩ in both instances? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 19

12 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for a
short to ground

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 13

13 1 Gain access to the control valve body wiring harness, refer to Replace the control
7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. valve body wiring
harness, refer to
2 Test for a short to ground in the control valve body wiring 7C4 Automatic
harness. Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
Did you find a short to ground condition?
Servicing

Go to Step 19 Go to Step 14

14 1 Test each solenoid for a short to ground.

2 Replace the faulty solenoid as necessary.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 19 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–100

Step Action Yes No

15 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 —

16 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 3 and C-96 pin 20 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 20

17 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 3 and C-96 pin 20 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 20

18 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 19 —

19 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / 2-3 Shift Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 and ensure the following conditions are


met::

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid B On and the


Shift Solenoid A Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid B Off and the


Shift Solenoid A Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• All conditions are met for 5 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0976 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 20

20 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.31 DTC P0977 – 2-3 Shift Solenoid Control


Circuit High Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P0977 2-3 Shift Solenoid (SS) Control Circuit High Voltage.

Circuit Description
The 2-3 shift solenoid (SS) valve controls the fluid flow acting on the 2-3 shift valves. The solenoid is a normally-open
exhaust valve. With the 1-2 SS valve, the 2-3 SS valve allows four different shifting combinations. The solenoid attaches
to the control valve body within the transmission. The 2-3 SS valve receives voltage through the ignition voltage circuit.
The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing the ground path on the 2-3 SS valve control
circuit.

When the TCM detects a continuous short to voltage in the 2-3 shift solenoid valve control circuit, then DTC P0977 sets.
DTC P0977 is a type A DTC.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–101

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is 500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P0977 sets if the TCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage feedback remains high, battery voltage.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P0977 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

3 Checks for a short to voltage in the 2-3 SS signal circuit.

4 Checks the serviceability of the 2-3 SS.

DTC P0977 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–102

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous
Tests / Shift Solenoid B.

8 With Tech 2 command the shift solenoid B ON and OFF three


times.
Check for an
9 On Tech 2 select: intermittent fault in
Data Display / 2-3 Shift Data. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does Tech 2 display the Shift Solenoid B Circuit as Okay? and Chassis Go to Step 3

3 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set.

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 3 and a


known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4

4 1 Install Tool No. J44152 on to the transmission connector E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 3.

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7

5 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the 2-3 SS and the control valve body wiring
Replace the control
harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –
Replace the 2-3 SS, valve body wiring
On-vehicle Servicing.
refer to harness, refer to
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the 2-3 SS. 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
2-3 SS pins. Servicing. Servicing

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 8


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–103

Step Action Yes No

6 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 3 and C-96 pin 30 for a
short to voltage.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 8 —

8 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / 2-3 Shift Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 and ensure the following conditions are


met::

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid B On and the


Shift Solenoid B Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• The TCM commands the Shift Solenoid B Off and the


Shift Solenoid B Circuit status parameter displays Okay.

• All conditions are met for 5 seconds.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P0977 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9

9 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.32 DTC P1810, P1815 and P1816 –


Transmission Fluid Pressure Position
Switch

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports the following DTCs:

• DTC P1810 Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Position Switch Circuit.

• DTC P1815 Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Valve Position Switch – Start in Wrong Range.

• DTC P1816 Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Valve Position Switch Indicates Park/Neutral (P/N) with Drive Ratio.

Circuit Description
The automatic transmission fluid pressure (TFP) manual valve position switch consists of five pressure switches
(two normally-closed and three normally-open) and a transmission fluid temperature (TFT) sensor combined into one unit.
The combined unit mounts on the valve body. The transmission control module (TCM) supplies ignition voltage for each
range signal. By grounding one or more of these circuits through various combinations of the pressure switches, the
TCM detects which manual valve position you select. The TCM compares the actual voltage combination of the switches
to a TFP manual valve position switch combination chart stored in memory.

The TFP manual valve position switch cannot distinguish between park and neutral because the monitored valve body
pressures are identical. With the engine off and the ignition switch on, the TFP manual valve position switch indicates
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–104

park/neutral. Disconnecting connector E-95 from the transmission removes the ground potential for the three range
signals to the TCM. In this case, with the engine off, and the ignition switch on, D2 will be indicated.

When the TCM detects an invalid state of the TFP manual valve position switch circuit by deciphering the TFP manual
valve position switch inputs, then either DTC P1810, P1815 or P1816 sets. All theses DTCs are a type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC

DTC P1810
• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is greater than 500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

DTC P1815
• No DTCs P0722 or P0723.

• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is less than 50 r.p.m., then 50 – 650 r.p.m. for 0.75 seconds, then greater than 650 r.p.m. for
5 seconds.

• Output shaft speed less than 250 r.p.m.

DTC P1816
• No DTCs P0722 or P0723.

• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is less than 50 r.p.m., then 50 – 650 r.p.m. for 0.75 seconds, then greater than 650 r.p.m. for
5 seconds.

• Output shaft speed less than 250 r.p.m.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC P1810
DTC P1810 sets when the TCM detects an invalid TFP manual valve position switch state for 60 seconds.

DTC P1815
DTC P1815 sets when the TCM detects D2 only, TFP manual valve position switch state after engine start for 7 seconds.

DTC P1816
DTC P1816 sets when the TCM detects one of the following conditions for 13 seconds:

• park/neutral indicated with a 1st gear ratio,

• park/neutral indicated with a 2nd gear ratio,

• park/neutral indicated with a 3rd gear ratio, or

• park/neutral indicated with a 4th gear ratio.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–105

• The TCM commands 4th gear.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores the DTC in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting the
DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Diagnostic Aids
• Refer to the 5.3 Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual Valve Position Switch Logic for the normal range signals
and the invalid combinations. On the table, LOW is 0 V, HI is ignition voltage.

• Sediment in the valve body may cause improper operation of the TFP manual valve position switch. If the presence
of sediment is suspected, clean the valve body and replace the TFP manual valve position switch.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

3 Checks the indicated range signal to the selected manual valve position.

4-5 Checks for correct voltage from the TCM to the transmission inline 20-way connector.

6 Checks if there is a short between any of the signal circuits.

DTC P1810, P1815 and P1816 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 Inspect for correct transmission fluid level, refer to 7C4 Automatic Refer to
Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. 7C4 Automatic
Transmission –
Did you perform the fluid checking procedure? 4L60E – On-vehicle
Go to Step 3 Servicing
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–106

Step Action Yes No

3 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Start the engine and idle at normal operating temperature.

8 Apply the brake pedal.

9 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / Transmission Data.
Check for an
10 Select each transmission range: P, R, N, D4, D3, D2 and D1. intermittent fault in
the circuit, refer to
Does each selected transmission range match the TFP Gear 8A Electrical-Body
displayed on Tech 2? and Chassis Go to Step 4

4 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set.

3 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

Does Tech 2 display Open 12V for any of the TFP Switch. A/B/C
parameters? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7

5 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

3 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

4 Using a multimeter set to measure voltage, probe between the


following pins and ground:

• connector E-95 pin 5,

• connector E-95 pin 13, and

• connector E-95 pin 12.

Did the multimeter display 10 – 12 V for all the tests? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 8
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–107

Step Action Yes No

6 1 Disconnect connector C-96 from the TCM.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the


following pins:

• connector E-95 pins 5 and 13,

• connector E-95 pins 5 and 12, and

• connector E-95 pins 12 and 13.

Does the multimeter display continuity in any of the tests? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10

7 Test the circuit (A/B/C) that displayed Closed on Tech 2, for a short to
ground between connector E-95 and C-96.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 11

8 Test the signal circuits of the TFP manual valve position switch that
did not indicate battery voltage for an open circuit between connectors
E-95 and C-96.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 11

9 Test the affected signal circuits of the TFP manual valve position
switch for a shorted together condition between E-95 and C-96.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 11

10 Test the TFP circuits for an open circuit or shorted condition between Replace the control Replace the TFP
connector E-95 and the TFP manual valve position switch. valve body wiring manual valve
harness, refer to position switch, refer
Did you find a condition? 7C4 Automatic to 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
Servicing. Servicing.

Go to Step 12 Go to Step 12

11 Replace the TCM refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 12 —

12 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Operate the vehicle under the following conditions:

• Turn on the ignition, with the engine off for at least


2 seconds.

• Start the vehicle and idle for 5 seconds.

• Drive in D4 until the TCC locks for 10 seconds.

• Continue to run the engine for at least 60 seconds from


start-up.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P1810 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 13


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–108

Step Action Yes No

13 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.33 DTC P2763 – Torque Converter Clutch


Pressure Control Solenoid Control
Circuit High Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P2763 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Control
Circuit High Voltage.

Circuit Description
The torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid valve controls the fluid acting on the converter
clutch valve. The converter clutch valve controls the TCC application and release. The solenoid attaches to the control
valve body within the transmission. The solenoid receives voltage through ignition voltage circuit. The transmission
control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing a ground path on the TCC PWM solenoid valve control circuit.
Current flows through the solenoid coil according to the duty cycle, percentage of on and off time. The TCC PWM
solenoid valve provides a smooth engagement of the TCC by operating during a duty cycle percent of on time.

When the TCM detects a continuous short to voltage in the TCC PWM solenoid valve control circuit, then DTC P2763
sets. DTC P2763 is a type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is 500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P2763 sets if the TCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage feedback remains high, battery voltage.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• The TCM inhibits 4th gear if in hot mode.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P2763 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–109

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks for a short to voltage in the TCC PWM solenoid valve signal circuit.

3 Checks the serviceability of the TCC PWM solenoid valve.

DTC P2763 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous
Tests / TCC PWM Solenoid.

8 With Tech 2 command the TCC PWM solenoid ON and OFF


three times.
Check for an
9 On Tech 2 select: intermittent fault in
Data Display / TCC Data. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does Tech 2 display the TCC Duty Cycle Circuit as Okay? and Chassis Go to Step 3
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–110

Step Action Yes No

3 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 11 and a


known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 4

4 1 Install Tool No. J44152 on to the transmission connector E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 11.

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 7

5 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the TCC PWM solenoid and the control valve
Replace the control
body wiring harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –
Replace the TCC valve body wiring
4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.
PWM solenoid, refer harness, refer to
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the TCC PWM solenoid. to 7C4 Automatic 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
TCC PWM solenoid pins. Servicing. Servicing

Does the multimeter display less than 20 Ω? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 8

6 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 11 and C-96 pin 14 for a
short to voltage.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 8 —

8 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / TCC Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 and ensure the TCC Duty Cycle Circuit
parameter displays Okay for 5 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P2763 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 9

9 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–111

4.34 DTC P2764 – Torque Converter Clutch


Pressure Control Solenoid Control
Circuit Low Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P2764 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Pressure Control (PC) Solenoid Control
Circuit Low Voltage.

Circuit Description
The torque converter clutch pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid valve controls the fluid acting on the converter
clutch valve. The converter clutch valve controls the TCC application and release. The solenoid attaches to the control
valve body within the transmission. The solenoid receives voltage through ignition voltage circuit. The transmission
control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing a ground path on the TCC PWM solenoid valve control circuit.
Current flows through the solenoid coil according to the duty cycle, percentage of on and off time. The TCC PWM
solenoid valve provides a smooth engagement of the TCC by operating during a duty cycle percent of on time.

When the TCM detects a continuous open or short to ground in the TCC PWM solenoid valve control circuit, then
DTC P2764 sets. DTC P2764 is a type A DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is 500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P2764 sets when either of the following conditions occurs for 5 seconds:

• The TCM detects an open in the TCC PWM shift solenoid valve circuit when the TCC PWM is commanded on.

• The TCM detects a short to ground in the TCC PWM shift solenoid valve circuit when the TCC PWM is
commanded on.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the Conditions for
Setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• The TCM inhibits 4th gear if in hot mode.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P2764 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–112

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

4 Checks the ability of the TCM to control the solenoid.

5 Checks for supply voltage to the TCC PWM solenoid valve.

6 Checks the ability of the TCM and wiring to control the ground circuit.

8 Checks the resistance of the control valve body wiring harness and the TCC PWM solenoid valve.

9 Checks if the TCC PWM solenoid valve or control valve body wiring harness is shorted to the transmission housing.

13 Checks if the control valve body wiring harness is shorted to ground.

14 Checks if any of the other solenoids in the transmission are shorted to ground.

DTC P2764 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

Are any of the following DTCs also set?

• P0787

• P0973

• P0976

• P2769. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 Inspect fuse C-8 and check if it is blown, refer to 8A Electrical-Body


and Chassis. Replace the fuse

Is the fuse blown? Go to Step 12 Go to Step 5


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–113

Step Action Yes No

4 1 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous
Tests / TCC PWM solenoid.

2 With Tech 2 command the TCC PWM solenoid ON and OFF


three times.
Check for an
3 On Tech 2 select: intermittent fault in
Data Display / TCC Data. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does Tech 2 display the TCC Duty Cycle Circuit as Okay? and Chassis Go to Step 5

5 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set.

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 10 and a


known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 6 Go to Step 15

6 1 Using a test lamp, probe connector E-95 pin 10 with the ground
lead to connector E-95 pin 19.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous Tests / TCC PWM
Solenoid.

3 With Tech 2 command the TCC PWM Solenoid On and Off


three times.

Does the test lamp turn on and off with each command? Go to Step 8 Go to Step 7

7 Is the test lamp always illuminated? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 17

8 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the harness connector E-95 and
install on to the transmission connector E-95.

2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across


transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 19.

Does the multimeter display 10 – 15 Ω? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 10

9 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between:

• Transmission connector E-95 pin 10 and a known ground. Check for an


intermittent fault in
• Transmission connector E-95 pin 19 and a known ground. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Does the multimeter display greater than 250 kΩ in both instances? and Chassis Go to Step 11

10 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.

2 Gain access to the TCC PWM solenoid and the control valve
Replace the control
body wiring harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission –
valve body wiring Replace the TCC
4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing.
harness, refer to PWM solenoid, refer
3 Disconnect the internal connector from the TCC PWM solenoid. 7C4 Automatic to 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
4 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across the 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
TCC PWM solenoid pins. Servicing Servicing.

Does the multimeter display 10 – 15 Ω? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 19


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–114

Step Action Yes No

11 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the transmission.


Replace the control
2 Gain access to the TCC PWM solenoid and the control valve valve body wiring Replace the TCC
body wiring harness, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – harness, refer to PWM solenoid, refer
4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. 7C4 Automatic to 7C4 Automatic
Transmission – Transmission –
3 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between 4L60E – On-vehicle 4L60E – On-vehicle
each of the TCC PWM solenoid pins and a known ground. Servicing Servicing.

Does the multimeter display 250 kΩ in both instances? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 19

12 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 13

13 1 Gain access to the control valve body wiring harness, refer to Replace the control
7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. valve body wiring
harness, refer to
2 Test for a short to ground in the control valve body wiring 7C4 Automatic
harness. Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
Did you find a short to ground condition?
Servicing

Go to Step 19 Go to Step 14

14 1 Test each solenoid for a short to ground.

2 Replace the faulty solenoid as necessary.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 19 —

15 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 —

16 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 11 and C-96 pin 14 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 20

17 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 11 and C-96 pin 14 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 19 Go to Step 20

18 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 19 —

19 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Data Display / TCC Data.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4 and ensure the TCC Duty Cycle Circuit
parameter displays Okay for 5 seconds.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P2764 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 20


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–115

Step Action Yes No

20 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.35 DTC P2769 – Torque Converter Clutch


Enable Solenoid Control Circuit Low
Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P2769 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Enable Solenoid Control Circuit Low
Voltage.

Circuit Description
The torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid valve is an electrical device that is used with the torque converter clutch
pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid valve to control TCC apply and release. The TCC solenoid valve attaches
to the transmission case assembly extending into the pump cover. The TCC solenoid valve receives voltage through
ignition voltage circuit. The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing the ground path on the
TCC solenoid valve control circuit. The TCM monitors the throttle position (TP) voltage, the vehicle speed and other
inputs to determine when to energize the TCC solenoid valve.

NOTE
The TCC solenoid valve is part of the control
valve body wiring harness. To replace the
solenoid valve, the control valve body harness
must be replaced.

When the TCM detects a continuous open or short to ground in the TCC solenoid valve control circuit, then DTC P2769
sets. DTC P2769 is a type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is 500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P2769 sets when either of the following conditions occurs for 5 seconds:

• The TCM detects an open in the TCC solenoid valve circuit when the TCC is commanded on.

• The TCM detects a short to ground in the TCC shift solenoid valve circuit when the TCC is commanded on.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• The TCM inhibits 4th gear if in hot mode.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–116

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P2769 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

Diagnostic Aids
With the TCC engaged, the TCC slip speed should be -20 – +40 r.p.m.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

4 Checks for supply voltage to the 3-2 SS valve.

5 Checks the ability of the TCM and wiring to control the ground circuit.

7 Checks the resistance of the control valve body wiring harness and the TCC solenoid valve.

8 Checks if the TCC solenoid valve or control valve body wiring harness is shorted to the transmission housing.

10 Checks if the control valve body wiring harness is shorted to ground.

11 Checks whether any of the other solenoids in the transmission are shorted to ground.

DTC P2769 Diagnostic Table


1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to
4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–117

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

Are any of the following DTCs also set?

• P0787

• P0973

• P0976

• P2764. Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4

3 Inspect fuse F8 and check if it is blown, refer to 8A Electrical-Body


and Chassis. Replace the fuse

Is the fuse blown? Go to Step 9 Go to Step 5

4 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Additional DTCs may set.

3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the


harness connector E-95.

4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

5 Using a test lamp, probe between connector E-95 pin 10 and a


known ground.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 12

5 1 Using a test lamp, probe connector E-95 pin 10 with the ground
lead to connector E-95 pin 20.

2 On Tech 2 select:
Automatic Transmission / Miscellaneous Tests / TCC
Solenoid.

3 With Tech 2 command the TCC Solenoid On and Off three


times.

Does the test lamp turn on and off with each command? Go to Step 7 Go to Step 6

6 Is the test lamp always illuminated? Go to Step 13 Go to Step 14


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–118

7 1 Remove Tool No. J44152 from the harness connector Replace the control
X121 – X1 and install on to the transmission connector valve body wiring
X121 – X1. harness and TCC
solenoid, refer to
2 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe across 7C4 Automatic
transmission connector E-95 pins 10 and 20. Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
Does the multimeter display 21 – 33 Ω?
Servicing

Go to Step 8 Go to Step 16

8 Using a multimeter set to measure resistance, probe between: Replace the control
valve body wiring
• Transmission connector E-95 pin 10 and a known ground. harness and TCC
solenoid, refer to
• Transmission connector E-95 pin 20 and a known ground. 7C4 Automatic
Check for an Transmission –
Does the multimeter display greater than 250 kΩ in both instances? intermittent fault in 4L60E – On-vehicle
the circuit, refer to Servicing
8A Electrical-Body
and Chassis Go to Step 16

9 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 10

10 1 Gain access to the control valve body wiring harness, refer to Replace the control
7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing. valve body wiring
harness and TCC
2 Test for a short to ground in the control valve body wiring solenoid, refer to
harness. 7C4 Automatic
Transmission –
Did you find a short to ground condition?
4L60E – On-vehicle
Servicing

Go to Step 16 Go to Step 11

11 1 Test each solenoid for a short to ground.

2 Replace the faulty solenoid as necessary.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 16 —

12 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 10 and C-107 pin 9 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 16 —

13 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 20 and C-96 pin 25 for a
short to ground.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 15

14 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 20 and C-96 pin 25 for an
open circuit.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 16 Go to Step 15

15 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 16 —


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–119

16 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Miscellaneous Tests / TCC Solenoid.

4 Drive the vehicle in D4. With Tech 2 command the TCC solenoid
valve On for 5 seconds and Off for 5 seconds

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P2769 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 17

On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
17 4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.36 DTC P2770 – Torque Converter Clutch


Enable Solenoid Control Circuit High
Voltage

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports DTC P2770 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Enable Solenoid Control Circuit High
Voltage.

Circuit Description
The torque converter clutch (TCC) solenoid valve is an electrical device that is used with the torque converter clutch
pulse width modulation (TCC PWM) solenoid valve to control TCC apply and release. The TCC solenoid valve attaches
to the transmission case assembly extending into the pump cover. The TCC solenoid valve receives voltage through
ignition voltage circuit. The transmission control module (TCM) controls the solenoid by providing the ground path on the
TCC solenoid valve control circuit. The TCM monitors the throttle position (TP) voltage, the vehicle speed and other
inputs to determine when to energize the TCC solenoid valve.

NOTE
The TCC solenoid valve is part of the control
valve body wiring harness. To replace the
solenoid valve, the control valve body harness
must be replaced.

When the TCM detects a continuous short to voltage in the TCC solenoid valve control circuit, then DTC P2770 sets.
DTC P2770 is a type B DTC.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


• The system voltage is 8 – 18 V.

• The engine speed is 500 r.p.m. for 5 seconds.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


DTC P2770 sets if the TCM commands the solenoid on and the voltage feedback remains high, battery voltage.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–120

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• The TCM inhibits 4th gear if in hot mode.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores DTC P2770 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for setting
the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following numbers refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

2 Checks for a short to voltage in the TCC solenoid valve signal circuit. Isolates whether the TCM or the TCC
solenoid valve and control valve body wiring harness are at fault.

DTC P2770 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check

2 1 Turn off the ignition.

2 Disconnect connector E-95 from the transmission.

NOTE
Replace the internal
Additional DTCs may set. wiring harness and
TCC solenoid valve,
3 Install Tool No. J 44152 Jumper Harness (20 pins) on to the
refer to
harness connector E-95.
7C4 Automatic
4 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off. Transmission –
4L60E – On-vehicle
5 Using a test lamp, probe connector E-95 pin 20 to ground. Servicing.

Does the test lamp illuminate? Go to Step 3 Go to Step 5

3 Using a multimeter, test between E-95 pin 20 and C-96 pin 25 for a
short to voltage.

Did you find and correct the condition? Go to Step 5 Go to Step 4


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–121

Step Action Yes No

4 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Service

Did you complete the replacement? Go to Step 5 —

5 Perform the following procedure to verify the repair:

1 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs

2 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear any DTCs.

3 Drive the vehicle in D4.

4 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information.

Has DTC P2770 set? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 6

6 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. Refer to
4.8 Diagnostic
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs you have not diagnosed? Trouble Code List System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.

4.37 DTC U0073 and U0100 – CAN-Bus No


Communication With ECM (Engine
Control Module)

DTC Description
This diagnostic procedure supports:

DTC U0073 – CAN-Bus No Communication With ECM (Engine Control Module)

DTC U0100 – CAN-Bus No Communication With ECM (Engine Control Module)

Circuit Description
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) communicates directly with the control modules connected to the GM LAN
serial data communication circuit through the GM LAN protocol. The first module that CAN-Bus is connected to is the
Engine Control Module (ECM).

DTC U0073 or DTC U0100 will set if communications between the TCM and ECM are lost.

Refer to 2 Wiring Diagrams and Connector Chart to aid in diagnosis.

Conditions for Running the DTC


DTC U0073 and DTC U0101 runs continuously when the following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on for longer than 3 seconds.

• The ignition voltage is 10.0 – 16.0 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC

DTC U0073
The TCM detects a short to ground between C-96 pin 7 and C-96 pin 49 within the specified time frame

DTC U0100
The TCM detects a short to ground between both C-96 pin 6 & 7 and C-96 pin 49 within the specifed time frame.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–122

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


• The TCM requests the ECM to illuminate the MIL during the second consecutive trip in which the conditions for
setting the DTC are met.

• The TCM commands maximum line pressure.

• The TCM freezes transmission adaptive functions.

• The TCM inhibits TCC engagement.

• At the time of the first failure, the TCM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC are
met. The TCM stores this information as a Failure Record.

• At the time of the second failure, the ECM records the operating conditions when the conditions for setting the DTC
are met. The ECM stores this information as a Freeze Frame.

• The TCM stores either DTC U0073 or DTC U0100 in TCM history during the second consecutive trip in which the
conditions for setting the DTC are met.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


• The ECM turns off the MIL after the fourth consecutive drive trip in which the TCM does not send a MIL illumination
request.

• Tech 2 can clear the DTC.

• The TCM clears the DTC from TCM history if the vehicle completes 40 warm-up cycles without a non-emission
related diagnostic fault occurring.

• The TCM cancels the DTC default actions when the ignition is off long enough to power down the TCM.

Test Description
The following number refers to the step numbers in the diagnostic table:

1 The following tests are included in the Diagnostic System Check.

• Tests the integrity of the GM LAN serial data communication circuit.

• Tests for fault conditions on the vehicle immobiliser system stored in the ICU.

DTC P0864 and U0101 Diagnostic Table


Step Action Yes No

1 Has the Diagnostic System Check been performed? Refer to


4.7 Diagnostic
Go to Step 2 System Check
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–123

Step Action Yes No

2 1 Connect Tech 2 to the DLC.

2 Turn on the ignition, with the engine off.

NOTE
Before clearing the DTC, use the Tech 2 Freeze
Frame/Failure Record to record the transmission
parameters at the time the DTC set. Using Tech 2 to clear
the DTC(s) erases the Freeze Frame/Failure Record
records from the TCM.

3 On Tech 2 select:
Transmission / Automatic Transmission / Diagnostic
Trouble Codes / Freeze Frame.

4 Select the relevant DTC and note the parameters at the time of
the DTC setting.

5 On Tech 2 select:
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Clear Engine & Transmission
DTCs.

6 Follow the instructions on Tech 2 and clear the DTCs.

7 Operate the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC.
Check for an
8 On Tech 2 select: intermittent fault in
Diagnostic Trouble Codes / Read DTC Information. the circuit, refer to
8A Electrical-Body
Has either DTC PU0073 or DTC U0100 set? Go to Step 3 and Chassis

3 Using Tech 2, attempt to communicate with the PIM. Refer to the 6E1
Powertrain Interface
Does the PIM failed to communicate? Module – V6 Go to Step 4

4 Are DTCs also set in the PIM? Refer to 6E1


Powertrain Interface
Module – V6 Go to Step 5

5 Replace the TCM, refer to 7C4 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –


On-vehicle Servicing.

Was the repair completed? Go to Step 6 —

6 1 Using Tech 2, clear the DTCs.

2 Switch off the ignition for 30 seconds.

3 Start the engine.

4 Operate the vehicle within the conditions for running the DTC.

Does any of the serial data communication circuit – TCM DTCs fail
this ignition cycle? Go to Step 2 Go to Step 78

7 Using Tech 2, select the DTC display function. Go to the


appropriate DTC
Does Tech 2 display any DTCs? Table System OK

When all diagnosis and repairs are completed, check the system for correct operation.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–124

5 Electrical Specifications

5.1 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT)


Sensor Specifications
Temperature Minimum Resistance Normal Resistance Maximum Resistance Signal

°C Ω Ω Ω Volts

-40 90636 100707 110778 5.00

-30 47416 52684 57952 4.78

-20 25809 28677 31545 4.34

-10 14558 16176 17794 3.89

0 8481 9423 10365 3.45

10 5104 5671 6238 3.01

20 3164 3515 3867 2.56

30 2013 2237 2461 1.80

40 1313 1459 1605 1.10

50 876 973 1070 3.25

60 600 667 734 2.88

70 420 467 514 2.56

80 299 332 365 2.24

90 217 241 265 1.70

100 159 177 195 1.42

110 119 132 145 1.15

120 89.9 99.9 109.9 0.87

130 69.1 76.8 84.5 0.60

140 53.8 59.8 65.8 0.32

150 42.5 47.2 51.9 0.00

5.2 Range Reference


Range Park Reverse Neutral 4 3 2 1
st nd rd th st nd rd st nd st nd
Gear 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 ** 2 1 2 ***

Shift
Solenoid A
ON* ON* ON* ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
(1-2 Shift
Solenoid)

Shift
Solenoid B
ON* ON* ON* ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON
(2-3 Shift
Solenoid)

2-4 Band - - - - A - A - A - - A - A

Reverse
- A - - - - - - - - - - - -
Input Clutch
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–125

Range Park Reverse Neutral 4 3 2 1

Overrun
- - - - A A - - A A A A A A
Clutch

Forward
- - - A A A A A A A A A A A
Clutch

Forward
Sprag Clutch - - - H H H - H H H H H H H
Assembly

3-4 Clutch - - - - - A A - - A - - - -

Lo/Roller
- - - H - - - H - - H - H -
Clutch

Lo/Rev
A A - - - - - - - - - - A -
Clutch

A = Applied

H = Holding

ON = Solenoid is energised

OFF = Solenoid is de-energised

* Shift solenoid state is a function of the vehicles speed and may change if the vehicle speed increases sufficiently

** Manual shift from second to first gear is electronically prevented under normal operating conditions

*** Manual shift from first to second gear is only available above approximately 48 – 56 km/h

5.3 Transmission Fluid Pressure Manual


Valve Position Switch Logic
Gear Selector Position Signal A Signal B Signal C

Park/Neutral Open 12 V Closed 0 V Open 12 V

Reverse Closed 0 V Closed 0 V Open 12 V

Drive 4 Open 12 V Closed 0 V Closed 0 V

Drive 3 Open 12 V Open 12 V Closed 0 V

Drive 2 Open 12 V Open 12 V Open 12 V

Drive 1 Closed 0 V Open 12 V Open 12 V

Closed 0 V Open 12 V Closed 0 V


Invalid
Closed 0 V Closed 0 V Closed 0 V

5.4 Transmission Range Switch Logic


Gear Selector Position Signal A Signal B Signal C Signal P

Park (P) Closed 0 V Open 12 V Open 12 V Closed 0 V

Reverse (R) Closed 0 V Closed 0 V Open 12 V Open 12 V

Neutral (N) Open 12 V Closed 0 V Open 12 V Closed 0 V

Drive 4 (OD) Open 12 V Closed 0 V Closed 0 V Open 12 V

Drive 3 (3) Closed 0 V Closed 0 V Closed 0 V Closed 0 V

Drive 2 (2) Closed 0 V Open 12 V Closed 0 V Open 12 V

Drive 1 (1) Open 12 V Open 12 V Closed 0 V Closed 0 V


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–126

5.5 Component Resistance


Component Pass/Thru Pins Resistance at 20°C Resistance at 100°C Resistance to Ground
(Case)

Shift Solenoid A (1-2 A, E 19 – 24 Ω 24 – 31 Ω Greater than 250 kΩ


Shift Solenoid Valve)

Shift Solenoid B (2-3 B, E 19 – 24 Ω 24 – 31 Ω Greater than 250 kΩ


Shift Solenoid Valve)

TCC Solenoid Valve T, E 21 – 26 Ω 26 – 33 Ω Greater than 250 kΩ

TCC PWM Solenoid U, E 10 – 11 Ω 13 – 15 Ω Greater than 250 kΩ


Valve

3-2 Shift Solenoid S, E 20 – 24 Ω 29 – 32 Ω Greater than 250 kΩ


Valve

Pressure Control C, D 3–5Ω 4–7Ω Greater than 250 kΩ


Solenoid Valve

*Transmission Fluid M, L 3088 – 3942 Ω 159.3 – 198.0 Ω Greater than 10 MΩ


Temperature (TFT)
Sensor

Vehicle Speed Sensor A, B 1420Ω @ 25°C 2140 Ω @ 150°C Greater than 10 MΩ

*: The resistance of this device is necessarily temperature dependent and will therefore vary far more than any other
device. Refer to 5.1 Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) Sensor Specifications.

5.6 Shift Solenoid Valve State and Gear


Ratio
Gear 1-2 Shift Solenoid 2-3 Shift Solenoid Gear Ratio

1 ON ON 3.059:1

2 OFF ON 1.625:1

3 OFF OFF 1.000:1

4 ON OFF 0.696:1

5.7 Line Pressure


Pressure Control Solenoid Current (Amp) Approximate Line Pressure (PSI)

0.00 198 – 227

0.10 197 – 226

0.20 189 – 221

0.30 181 – 216

0.40 168 – 205

0.50 154 – 193

0.60 137 – 175

0.70 114 – 156

0.80 90 – 132

0.90 64 – 105

1.00 53 – 85

1.10 53 – 68
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Electrical Diagnosis Page 7C2–127

6 Special Tools
For a complete listing of all the special tools used for servicing the 4L60E hydra-matic automatic transmission, refer to
7C1 Automatic transmission – 4L60E – General Information.
MEMO
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–1

7C4
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E –
On-vehicle Servicing
ATTENTION
Before performing any service operation or other procedure described in this Section, refer to General
Information Warnings, Cautions and Notes for correct workshop practices with regard to safety and/or
property damage.

1 General Information ...............................................................................................................................3


1.1 General Service Information ................................................................................................................................. 3
Description ............................................................................................................................................................. 3
Service Information ............................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES.................................................................................................................... 3
Definition of WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE Statements................................................................................. 3
WARNING Defined............................................................................................................................................. 4
CAUTION Defined.............................................................................................................................................. 4
NOTE Defined .................................................................................................................................................... 4

2 Maintenance Operations........................................................................................................................5
2.1 Transmission Fluid ................................................................................................................................................ 5
Transmission Fluid Colour.................................................................................................................................... 5
Transmission Fluid Level ...................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 Reverse Flush and Flow Rate Test ....................................................................................................................... 6
Reverse Flush ........................................................................................................................................................ 6
Flow Rate Test........................................................................................................................................................ 7

3 Service Operations.................................................................................................................................8
3.1 Fluid Change and Filter Replacement .................................................................................................................. 8
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
Reinstall .................................................................................................................................................................. 9
3.2 Shift Selector Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 11
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 11
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.3 Selector Cable Assembly .................................................................................................................................... 14
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 15
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 15
3.4 Neutral Start and Back-up Lamp Switch ............................................................................................................ 16
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 16
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 17
Adjust.................................................................................................................................................................... 17
3.5 Vehicle Speed Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 18
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 18
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 19
3.6 Manual Shaft Oil Seal .......................................................................................................................................... 19
Replace ................................................................................................................................................................. 19
3.7 Transmission Support and Mount...................................................................................................................... 20
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 20
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 21
3.8 Extension Housing Oil Seal, RWD...................................................................................................................... 22
Replace ................................................................................................................................................................. 22
3.9 Extension Housing and Rear Bush, RWD.......................................................................................................... 22
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–2

Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 22
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 24
3.10 Adaptor Housing, 4WD ........................................................................................................................................ 24
Remove and Reinstall.......................................................................................................................................... 24
3.11 Shift Solenoid Locations..................................................................................................................................... 25
Location and Identification ................................................................................................................................. 25
3.12 1 – 2 Accumulator Assembly .............................................................................................................................. 25
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Clean and Inspect ................................................................................................................................................ 26
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 26
3.13 Control Valve Body Harness............................................................................................................................... 26
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 26
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 28
3.14 Control Valve Body.............................................................................................................................................. 30
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 30
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 31
3.15 Spacer Plate, Check Balls, Filter Screens and 3 – 4 Accumulator .................................................................. 35
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 35
Clean and Inspect ................................................................................................................................................ 36
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 37
3.16 Filler Tube and Breather Hose ............................................................................................................................ 39
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 39
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 40
3.17 Transmission Cooler Line/Hose Assemblies .................................................................................................... 41
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 41
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 42
3.18 Transmission Assembly...................................................................................................................................... 43
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 43
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 46
3.19 Transmission Control Module ............................................................................................................................ 47
Remove ................................................................................................................................................................. 47
Reinstall ................................................................................................................................................................ 48
TCM Programming Procedure ............................................................................................................................ 48

4 Specifications .......................................................................................................................................50

5 Torque Wrench Specifications............................................................................................................51

6 Special Tools ........................................................................................................................................52


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–3

1 General Information
This Section describes the removal and reinstallation procedures of the four speed 4L60E hydra-matic automatic
transmission as well as the service operations which can be performed with the transmission still fitted to the vehicle.

1.1 General Service Information

Description
The shift selector mechanism is linked to the transmission manual shaft with a selector cable. A heat protector is fitted
over the neutral start and back-up switch and manual shaft select lever.

For rear wheel drive (RWD) vehicles an extension housing is fitted to the rear of the transmission case.
Four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles have an adaptor housing and transfer case fitted to the rear of the transmission case,
for description and service operation refer to 7D Transfer Case and Adaptor Housing.

The four speed 4L60E hydra-matic automatic transmission is fitted with a filler tube, a breather hose and a vent pipe for
hot fluid overflow.

The transmission fluid is driven through a cooler within the radiator via the cooler line/hose assemblies to maintain
normal operating temperature.

Service Information

Throughout the service operations within this


Section, when handling retaining clips, using
compressed air or cleaning fluids, wear safety
equipment to avoid personal injury.

Refer to 7C1 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – General Information for the following:

• information relating to mechanical and electrical operations,

• abbreviations, transmission specifications, special tools and torque wrench specifications,

• servicing, cleaning and inspection procedure recommendations.

It is essential to read and understand the General Information, Warnings, Cautions and Service Notes contained in that
same Section, before any service operation is performed on the four speed 4L60E hydra-matic automatic transmission or
any associated components.
Failure to comply with the procedures and service notes can affect the reliable and efficient operation of this automatic
transmission.

1.2 WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTES


This Section contains various WARNINGS, CAUTIONS and NOTE statements that you must observe carefully to reduce
the risk of death or injury during service, repair procedures or vehicle operation. Incorrect service or repair procedures
may damage the vehicle or cause operational faults. WARNINGS, CAUTION and NOTE statements are not exhaustive.
GM HOLDEN LTD can not possibly warn of all the potentially hazardous consequences of failure to follow these
instructions.

Definition of WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE Statements


Diagnosis and repair procedures in this Section contain both general and specific WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE
statements. GM HOLDEN LTD is dedicated to the presentation of service information that helps the technician to
diagnose and repair the systems necessary for proper operation of the vehicle. Certain procedures may present a hazard
to the technician if they are not followed in the recommended manner. WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE statements are
designed to help prevent these hazards from occurring, but not all hazards can be foreseen.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–4

WARNING Defined
A WARNING statement immediately precedes an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not correctly
followed, could result in death or injury. A WARNING statement alerts you to take necessary action or not to take a
prohibited action. If a WARNING statement is ignored, the following consequences may occur:

• Death or injury to the technician or other personnel working on the vehicle,

• Death or injury to other people in or near the workplace area, and / or

• Death or injury to the driver / or passenger(s) of the vehicle or other people, if the vehicle has been improperly
repaired.

CAUTION Defined
A CAUTION statement immediately precedes an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not correctly
followed, could result in damage to or destruction of equipment, or corruption of data. If a CAUTION statement is ignored,
the following consequences may occur:

• Damage to the vehicle,

• Unnecessary vehicle repairs or component replacement,

• Faulty operation or performance of any system or component being repaired,

• Damage to any system or components which depend on the proper operation of the system or component being
repaired,

• Faulty operation or performance of any systems or components which depend on the proper operation or
performance of the system or component under repair,

• Damage to fasteners, basic tools or special tools and / or

• Leakage of coolant, lubricant or other vital fluids.

NOTE Defined
A NOTE statement immediately precedes or follows an operating procedure, maintenance practice or condition that
requires highlighting. A NOTE statement also emphasises necessary characteristics of a diagnostic or repair procedure.
A NOTE statement is designed to:

• Clarify a procedure,

• Present additional information for accomplishing a procedure,

• Give insight into the reasons for performing a procedure in the recommended manner, and / or

• Present information that gives the technician the benefit of past experience in accomplishing a procedure with
greater ease.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–5

2 Maintenance Operations

2.1 Transmission Fluid


When adding or changing the transmission fluid, use only the recommended automatic transmission fluid, refer to
0B Maintenance and Lubrication.

For the automatic transmission fluid diagnosis, refer to 7C3 Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – Hydraulic and
Mechanical Diagnosis.

Transmission Fluid Colour


New transmission fluid is red in colour due to a dye that is added to the fluid so it can be distinguished from other oils and
lubricants. The red dye is not permanent and as such, is not an indicator of the quality of the fluid.
As the vehicle is driven the transmission fluid will quickly look darker in colour and appear to be a light brown. A dark
brown colour with a distinctively burnt odour may indicate fluid deterioration and the need for fluid replacement.

NOTE
A dark brown fluid colour observed, coupled with
a reported delayed shift pattern may only indicate
that fluid replacement is required. This is not a
definite indication of a potential transmission
failure.

Transmission Fluid Level

NOTE
Carry out this operation with the transmission at
normal operating temperature (82 – 94°C), as the
temperature greatly affects the fluid level.

1 Drive the vehicle for a distance of at least 25 km to bring the transmission up to normal operating temperature.

If the transmission is not at normal operating


temperature and the correct procedure is not
followed, the result could be a false reading of
the fluid level on the transmission fluid
indicator.

2 If the vehicle has been operated under any of the following conditions, switch the engine off and allow the
transmission to cool for approximately thirty minutes:

• in high ambient temperatures above 32° C,

• at sustained high speeds,

• in heavy stop / start city traffic during hot weather, or

• towing.

3 Park the vehicle on level ground.

4 Move the gear selector to the Park position and apply the park brake.

5 Allow the engine to idle for 3 minutes with the accessories turned off.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–6

6 Lift the locking lever (1) on the transmission fluid


indicator, then remove the indicator from the filler
tube (2) and check the fluid colour, condition and level.

Do not overfill the transmission. Overfilling


can cause aeration resulting in fluid loss,
shift complaints and possible damage to the
transmission.

7 If the transmission fluid level is low, add only enough


of the recommended fluid until its level shows onto the
crosshatch hot area (3) of the fluid indicator.

Figure 7C4 – 1

2.2 Reverse Flush and Flow Rate Test


It is essential to perform a reverse flush and oil cooler flow rate test after any of the following:

• the transmission is repaired or replaced,

• fluid contamination is suspected, or

• whenever the oil pump and/or torque converter is replaced.

NOTE
The reverse flush must be completed prior to
conducting a flow rate test.

Reverse Flush
1 Disconnect both cooler hose/line assemblies at the transmission and at the radiator cooler, refer to
3.17 Transmission Cooler Line/Hose Assemblies.

2 Check the cooler hose/line to radiator cooler fittings for damage, replace as required.

To avoid personal injury, wear safety glasses


when using compressed air.

3 Carefully check the radiator cooler lower fitting to see if any foreign material is evident at this point. If foreign
material is found, remove it with a suitable tool and/or compressed air at a reduced pressure of approximately
345 kPa blown in the reverse direction through the cooler.

4 Using compressed air at a reduced pressure of approximately 345 kPa blown in a reverse direction, clean the
cooler hose/line assemblies.

5 Reconnect the cooler outlet line to the transmission and both cooler hose/line assemblies to the radiator cooler
fittings, refer to 3.17 Transmission Cooler Line/Hose Assemblies.

NOTE
Do not reconnect the cooler inlet line at the
transmission end. This line needs to be left
disconnected to perform the flow rate test.

6 Perform the flow rate test, refer to Flow Rate Test in this Section.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–7

NOTE
This will also flush the cooler hose/line
assemblies and cooler with transmission fluid.

7 If the flow rate is satisfactory, reconnect the cooler inlet line to the transmission, refer to
3.17 Transmission Cooler Line/Hose Assemblies.

8 Lower the vehicle, check and top up the transmission fluid to the correct level as required, refer to
2.1 Transmission Fluid.

Flow Rate Test

Do not run the engine any longer than


absolutely necessary, as a fluid level too low
can cause aeration and foaming.

1 Ensure the transmission fluid is at the recommended level or slightly above, refer to 2.1 Transmission Fluid.

2 Disconnect the cooler inlet line at the transmission quick-connect fitting, refer to 3.17 Transmission Cooler
Line/Hose Assemblies.

3 Place a suitable size container underneath the disconnected cooler inlet line.

4 With the selector lever in the P position, start the engine and observe the fluid flow into the container after all the air
bubbles have ceased and a steady flow is evident. Measure the flow rate over 20 seconds and ensure it is within
the specification.

Transmission fluid flow rate specification per 20 Seconds:

Temperature:
Ambient............................................................ 0.7 Litres
86° – 93° C ...................................................... 1.2 Litres

5 If the flow rate is less than the specification, the cause of the low flow rate must be located and rectified.
Possible cause could include:

• restricted cooler within the radiator tank,

• kinked or damaged transmission cooler hose/line assemblies, or

• internal transmission fault such as a faulty pump.

6 Reinstall the cooler inlet line to the transmission quick-connect fitting, refer to 3.17 Transmission Cooler
Line/Hose Assemblies.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–8

3 Service Operations

3.1 Fluid Change and Filter Replacement

To avoid personal injury take note of the


following:
• Avoid accidental hot oil spillage by
performing fluid change only when the
transmission fluid is cold.
• Wear safety glasses and gloves when
using compressed air and cleaning fluids.

Remove
1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information.

2 Clean all dirt from around the oil pan and the transmission case.

3 Place a suitable sized drain tray under the


transmission.

4 Hold the oil pan (1) in place and remove the oil pan
bolts (2) from the front and both sides.

NOTE
Leave the three rear oil pan bolts in place.

5 Loosen the three rear oil pan bolts by about 4 turns


each. While still supporting the oil pan, lightly tap the
sides with a rubber hammer to break the gasket (3)
seal.

6 Lower the front of the oil pan and drain the fluid into a
suitable container.

7 Remove the three remaining rear bolts and the oil pan
from the transmission.

8 Remove the oil pan gasket and discard.


Figure 7C4 – 2
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–9

9 Remove the oil filter (1) by pulling down while twisting


the filter and remove it from the transmission.

10 Open the filter by prising the metal crimping away from


the top of the filter and pull it apart.

11 Inspect the filter material for particles that may indicate


evidence of a potential transmission problem.
Examples of the type of material are:

• clutch friction material,

• bronze slivers, indicating bush wear and

• steel particles.

Figure 7C4 – 3

Take care not to scratch the oil pump bore,


as fluid leakage could occur from this point
or the pump may suck in air, causing the
fluid to aerate.

12 Using suitable circlip pliers (1) or a two legged puller


and slide hammer, remove the oil filter seal (2) taking
care not to scratch the oil pump bore (3) during the
process. Discard the seal.

Figure 7C4 – 4

Reinstall
1 Clean the oil pan in a commercially available cleaning fluid and blow dry using compressed air.

NOTE
Ensure all traces of the old gasket are removed
from the transmission and oil pan.

2 Wipe the transmission case gasket mating surface with a clean lint free cloth.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–10

3 Lubricate a new oil filter seal (1) with clean


transmission fluid and install into the oil pump bore (2)
using a suitable sized socket or piece of tubing.

4 Install a new filter into the transmission case.

5 Check if the magnet is functional and located in the


designated position in the oil pan. Install a new gasket
and reinstall the oil pan.

6 Tighten the bolts attaching the oil pan to the correct


torque specification.

Oil pan attaching bolt


torque specification ............................................12.0 Nm

Figure 7C4 – 5

7 Lower vehicle and add approximately 4.8 litres of automatic transmission fluid.

8 Operate the vehicle for about 24 km or until normal transmission operating temperature is reached, refer to
2.1 Transmission Fluid.

9 Ensure there are no fluid leaks from the oil pan area, rectify as required.

10 Check and top up the transmission fluid to the correct level as required, refer 2.1 Transmission Fluid.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–11

3.2 Shift Selector Assembly

Figure 7C4 – 6

Legend
1 Rear Console 7 Selector Lever Assembly 13 Grooved Pin
2 Front Console 8 Sleeve 14 Selector Cable
3 Screw – Knob 9 Base Plate 15 Selector Lever Linkage
4 Knob 10 Upper Housing Assembly 16 Lamp
5 Button – Knob 11 Screw – Spring Plate 17 Nut – Base Plate
6 Spring – Knob 12 Spring Plate

Remove
1 Remove the front and rear console, refer to 10 Cab.

2 Position the transmission selector lever to the N position.

3 Remove the screw (3), two places, attaching the selector lever knob (4), refer to Figure 7C4 – 6.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–12

4 Remove the knob together with the button (5) and spring (6) from the selector lever assembly (7).

5 Turn the sleeve (8) counter clockwise to remove it, make note of the number of turns required to free it.

6 Remove the harness connectors from the base plate (9).

7 Remove the upper housing (10) which is held in place by four latched fasteners.

8 Remove the attaching screw (11) and spring plate (12).

9 Remove the grooved pin (13).

10 Using a small flat blade screwdriver, gently prise the upper end of the selector cable (14) from the pin on the
selector lever linkage (15).

11 Remove the selector lever assembly by pressing the rod down (lever in the N position).

12 If required, remove the lamp (16) from its socket by aligning the groove in the socket and the protruding part of the
lamp.

13 If required, remove the nut (17), four places, and the shift selector base plate.

Reinstall
1 Apply MULTEMP No 2 grease, or equivalent to the selector lever as indicated in Figure 7C4 – 7.

Figure 7C4 – 7

2 If required, install the shift selector base plate (9) and tighten the nut (17), four places, to the correct torque
specification, refer to Figure 7C4 – 6.

Shift selector base plate attaching nut


torque specification ..............................................7.0 Nm

3 Install the selector lever assembly (7) to the base plate:

a insert and secure the rod,

b insert the paw led end of the selector lever linkage (15) into the base plate hole,

c attach the end of the selector cable to the pin on the selector lever linkage,
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–13

d Install the grooved pin (13) in the selector lever.

4 Insert the grooved pin in the base plate détente groove


until it touches the front wall. The selector lever is in
the N position.

Figure 7C4 – 8

5 Install the spring plate (12) and tighten the screw (11) to the correct torque specification, refer to Figure 7C4 – 6.

Spring plate attaching screw


torque specification ..............................................2.0 Nm

6 With the selector lever knob temporarily installed, ensure the grooved pin of the selector lever moves smoothly in
the base plate détente groove.

7 Temporarily install the sleeve (8).

8 If previously removed, install the lamp (16) by aligning the groove in the socket and the protruding part of the lamp
and rotate the lamp 90 degrees clockwise.

9 Attach the harness connectors to the base plate.

10 Position the transmission selector lever to the P position.

11 Install the sleeve (8) by rotating it clockwise the same number of turns as noted on removal.

12 Fit the upper housing (10) over the selector lever assembly, do not secure at this stage.

13 Install the knob (4) together with the button (5) and spring (6) to the selector lever assembly.

14 Adjust the clearance (2) between the base plate


détente groove and the grooved pin by moving the
selector lever knob sleeve (1).

Base plate détente groove and


grooved pin clearance................................ 0.2 – 1.0 mm

Figure 7C4 – 9

15 Install the screw (3), two places, attaching the knob and tighten to the correct torque specification, refer to
Figure 7C4 – 6.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–14

Selector lever knob attaching screw


torque specification ..............................................2.0 Nm

16 Secure the upper housing (10) to the base plate with the four latched fasteners.

17 Install the front and rear console, refer to 10 Cab.

3.3 Selector Cable Assembly

Figure 7C4 – 10

Legend
1 Selector Cable 6 Screw – Heat Shield
2 Selector Lever Linkage 7 Heat Shield
3 Retaining Pawl – Selector Cable 8 External Manual Shaft Linkage
4 Shift Selector Base Plate 9 Bracket
5 Screw – Heat Shield 10 Bolt – Bracket
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–15

Remove
1 Remove the front and rear console, refer to 10 Cab.

2 Position the transmission selector lever to the N position.

3 Using a small flat blade screwdriver, gently prise the upper end of the selector cable (1) from the pin on the selector
lever linkage (2), refer to Figure 7C4 – 10.

4 Press on the selector cable retaining pawl (3) to remove the cable from the shift selector base plate (4).

5 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

6 Remove the three attaching screws (5 and 6) and the heat shield (7).

7 Using a small flat blade screwdriver, gently prise the transmission end of the selector cable from the transmission
external manual shaft linkage (8).

8 Remove the clip and selector cable from the bracket (9).

9 Pull the selector cable free from the bottom of the vehicle.

10 If required, remove the two attaching bolts (10) and the selector cable bracket.

Reinstall
1 Install the selector cable (1) toward the inside of the cabin from under the vehicle, refer to Figure 7C4 – 10.

2 Push the end of the selector cable into the shift selector base plate (4).

3 Attach the end of the selector cable to the pin on the selector lever linkage (2).

4 If required, install the selector cable bracket (9), tighten the two attaching bolts (10) to the correct torque
specification.

Selector cable bracket attaching


bolt torque specification .....................................22.0 Nm

5 Fit the selector cable to the bracket and install the clip on the marking of the selector cable.

6 Ensure the selector lever is in the N position.

7 Ensure the transmission external manual shaft


linkage (8) is in the N position.

Figure 7C4 – 11
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–16

8 Slide the cover (3) in the direction shown by the


arrow (1).

9 Using a small flat blade screwdriver, move the lock


piece (4) from the position indicated by the arrow (2).
Continue to move the lock piece until the adjuster (5)
position begins to change.

Figure 7C4 – 12

10 Connect the selector cable to the transmission


external manual shaft linkage.

11 Insert the lock piece in the adjuster to engage with the


serrated cable end (cable length adjustment).

12 Slide the cover (1) on the adjuster and secure the lock
piece.

Figure 7C4 – 13

13 Install the heat shield (7) and tighten the attaching screws (1 and 6) to the correct torque specification, refer to
Figure 7C4 – 10.

Heat shield front attaching screw


torque specification ............................................25.0 Nm

Heat shield rear attaching screw


torque specification ..............................................9.0 Nm

14 Move the selector lever to the P position and press the selector lever knob button five times.

15 Ensure the selector lever moves smoothly to each of its positions.

16 Check if the shift position indicated by the selector lever and the actual shift position are the same, rectify if
required.

17 Lower the vehicle to the ground. Ensure the engine can only be started with the transmission selector lever in Park
or Neutral position and the back-up lamps work correctly. If required, adjust the neutral start and back-up lamp
switch, refer to 3.4 Neutral Start and Back-up Lamp Switch.

18 Ensure the gear selection operates correctly.

19 Install the front and rear console, refer to 10 Cab.

3.4 Neutral Start and Back-up Lamp Switch

Remove
1 Position the transmission selector lever to the P position.

2 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–17

3 Remove the three attaching screws (1 and 2) and the


heat shield (3).

4 Hold the transmission manual shaft linkage (4) with an


adjustable wrench and remove the linkage attaching
nut (5).

5 Carefully remove the manual shaft linkage and


selector cable from the transmission manual shaft (6).

6 Prise the connector position assurance (CPA)


securing pin (7) from the neutral start and back-up
lamp switch (8) taking care not to break the pin in the
process. Disconnect the connector (9) from the switch
assembly by pulling down the release bar (10).

NOTE
The connector will automatically disconnect at
the same time the release bar is withdrawn.

7 Remove the attaching screw (11) and slide the switch


Figure 7C4 – 14
assembly over the transmission manual shaft to
remove it.

Reinstall
1 Slide the neutral start and back-up lamp switch (8) over the transmission manual shaft (6) and reinstall the two
attaching screws (1 and 11), tighten them finger tight until the adjustment process has been completed, refer to
Figure 7C4 – 14.

2 Install the manual shaft linkage (4) and the attaching nut (5). Hold the linkage with an adjustable wrench and
tighten the nut to the correct torque specification.

Manual shaft linkage attaching nut


torque specification ............................................25.0 Nm

3 Install the connector (9) but do not reinsert the CPA securing pin (7) at this stage.

4 Check the shift selector linkage operation and adjust as required, refer to 3.2 Shift Selector Assembly.

5 Check and adjust as required the neutral start and back-up lamp switch as described in this Section, refer to Adjust.

Adjust
1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

2 If required, loosen the neutral start and back-up lamp switch (8) as follows, refer to Figure 7C4 – 14:

a Remove the three attaching screws (1 and 2) and the heat shield (3).

b Prise the connector position assurance (CPA) securing pin (7) from the neutral start and back-up lamp switch
taking care not to break the pin in the process.

c Disconnect connector (9) from the switch assembly by pulling down the release bar (10).

NOTE
The connector will automatically disconnect at the
same time the release bar is withdrawn.

d Loosen the screw (11) attaching the switch and refit the front screw (1) keep them finger tight.

e Reinstall the connector (9) but do not reinsert the CPA securing pin at this stage.

3 Rotate the neutral start and back-up lamp switch back and forth until a central position is attained and then lightly
tighten the front screw (1) to prevent the switch from rotating.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–18

Ensure the four wheels are off the ground


before performing the starting test.

4 With the ignition switched to the ON position, check if the engine can only be started in the Park and Neutral shift
selector positions and ensure the back-up lamps illuminate when Reverse is selected. A further minor adjustment
may be required to achieve this state.

NOTE
To gain access to the rear attaching screw (11) it
will be necessary to remove the connector.

5 After the switch has been adjusted, tighten the rear attaching screw (11) to the correct torque specification.

Neutral start and back-up lamp switch


attaching screw torque specification ..................25.0 Nm

6 Reinstall the connector and the CPA securing pin.

7 Remove the switch front attaching screw (1).

8 Install the heat shield (3) and tighten the attaching screws (1 and 2) to the correct torque specification.

Heat shield front attaching screw


torque specification ............................................25.0 Nm

Heat shield rear attaching screw


torque specification ..............................................9.0 Nm

9 Lower the vehicle to the ground and re-check the operation of the neutral start and back-up lamp switch. The
vehicle must start only with the shift selector in the Park or Neutral positions and the back-up lamps should only
illuminate when Reverse is selected.

3.5 Vehicle Speed Sensor

NOTE
For the speed sensor fitted to four wheel drive
vehicles (4WD), refer to 7D Transfer Case and
Adaptor Housing.

Remove
1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer
to 0A General Information for the location of support
points.

2 Disconnect connector (1) from the vehicle speed


sensor (2).

3 Remove the bolt (3) attaching the speed sensor to the


transmission extension housing.

4 With a pulling and turning motion, remove the speed


sensor and O-ring seal (4) from the transmission
extension housing, discard the O-ring.

Figure 7C4 – 15
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–19

Reinstall
1 Lubricate a new O-ring seal with petroleum jelly and install it to the vehicle speed sensor.

2 Install the speed sensor to the transmission extension housing.

3 Install the attaching bolt and tighten to the correct torque specification.

Vehicle speed sensor attaching bolt


torque specification ............................................12.0 Nm

4 Connect the connector to the speed sensor.

5 Lower the vehicle to the ground.

3.6 Manual Shaft Oil Seal

Replace

NOTE
This procedure requires the use of special tool
No. AU583.

1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

2 Remove the neutral start and back-up lamp switch, refer to 3.4 Neutral Start and Back-up Lamp Switch.

3 Assemble the seal remover, Tool No. AU583-3 (1) by


installing the remover nut, Tool No. AU583-4 (2) with
its threaded inner diameter closest to the hexagonal
head of the seal remover tool. Install the nut up to the
hexagonal head.

4 Install the assembled seal remover tool over the


manual shaft (3) engaging the tapered thread end (4)
into the seal.

Do not over tighten the seal remover tool in


the seal.
Figure 7C4 – 16
5 Rotate the hexagonal head of the seal remover tool
clockwise, until the thread grips the steel shell of the
seal.

6 While holding the hexagonal head of the seal remover


tool (1) rotate the remover nut (2) clockwise, until it
contacts the transmission case.

7 Continue rotating the remover nut until the seal is


pulled into the remover nut cavity.

8 Remove and discard the seal.

Figure 7C4 – 17
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–20

9 Install the seal protector, Tool No. AU583-1 (1) into


one of the two plastic seal installers, Tool No.
AU583-2 (2).

NOTE
Two plastic seal installers are required because
of the restricted space between the end of the
manual shaft and the floor pan.

10 Lubricate the lip of a new seal (3) with clean automatic


transmission fluid and install it over the seal protector
sleeve, with the steel casing facing the installer tool.

11 Install the seal protector with the new seal and installer
tool over the manual shaft (4) and up to the
transmission case.

If the seal protector sleeve jams on the


manual shaft, the flats on the shaft locating
the selector lever will be burred. Use a fine
file to remove any burrs and then proceed.

12 Fit the second plastic seal installer over the manual


shaft until it seats against the first installer.
Figure 7C4 – 18
13 Install the manual shaft linkage attaching nut (5) and
tighten it to drive the seal in position into the
transmission case.

14 Remove the seal installer and protector tools from the


manual shaft.

15 Reinstall the neutral start and back-up lamp switch, refer to 3.4 Neutral Start and Back-up Lamp Switch.

16 Lower the vehicle to the ground and as required, check and top up the automatic transmission fluid level, refer to
2.1 Transmission Fluid.

3.7 Transmission Support and Mount

Remove
1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

2 Support the transmission with a Jack, do not place the support underneath the extension housing or the oil pan,
refer to Figure 7C4 – 19.

3 Remove the clip (1) holding the fuel feed and fuel vapour lines on the transmission support (2).

4 Remove the bolt (3) attaching the heat shield (4) to the transmission support.

5 Remove the two nuts (5) attaching the transmission mount to the support.

6 Remove the four bolts and nuts (6) attaching the transmission support to the under body side rails and remove the
support.

7 If required, remove the two bolts (7) attaching the transmission mount (8) to the extension housing and remove the
mount.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–21

Figure 7C4 – 19

Legend
1 Fuel Feed and Vapour Lines Clip 5 Transmission Mount Nuts
2 Transmission Support 6 Transmission Support Bolts
3 Heat Shield Bolt 7 Transmission Mount Bolts
4 Heat Shield 8 Transmission Mount

Reinstall
1 If required, install the transmission mount (8) onto the extension housing, tighten the two attaching bolts (7) to the
correct torque specification, refer to Figure 7C4 – 19.

Transmission mount attaching


bolt torque specification .....................................50.0 Nm

2 Install the transmission support (2) to the under body side rails and tighten the four attaching bolts and nuts (6) to
the correct torque specification.

Transmission support attaching


bolt and nut torque specification ........................50.0 Nm

3 Install and tighten the transmission mount two attaching nuts (5) to the correct torque specification.

Transmission mount attaching


nut torque specification ......................................52.0 Nm

4 Install the bolt (3) attaching the heat shield (4) to the transmission support, tighten to the correct torque
specification.

Heat shield to transmission support


attaching bolt torque specification......................52.0 Nm

5 Reinstall the clip (1) holding the fuel feed and fuel vapour lines on the transmission support.

6 Lower the vehicle to the ground.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–22

3.8 Extension Housing Oil Seal, RWD

Replace
1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

2 Remove the rear propeller shaft, refer to 4A Propeller Shaft.

3 Place a suitable size drip tray underneath rear of


transmission.

Take care not to scratch the machined seal


recess in the extension housing as
transmission fluid may weep past the outer
diameter of the installed seal.

4 Using the seal remover, Tool No. E308 (1) or


equivalent, prise the oil seal (2) from rear of the
extension housing (3) and discard the seal.

5 Thoroughly clean around the seal bore in the


extension housing and ensure there are no burrs.

Figure 7C4 – 20

6 Use the seal installer, Tool No. J21426 (1) and a soft
faced hammer to tap a new oil seal (2) into place in
the extension housing (3).

7 Install the rear propeller shaft, refer to 4A Propeller


Shaft.

8 Lower the vehicle to the ground and check the fluid


level, refer to 2.1 Transmission Fluid.

Figure 7C4 – 21

3.9 Extension Housing and Rear Bush, RWD

Remove
1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

2 As required, remove the following components:

a Rear propeller shaft, refer to 4A Propeller Shaft.

b Transmission support and mount assembly, refer to 3.7 Transmission Support and Mount.

c Vehicle speed sensor, refer to 3.5 Vehicle Speed Sensor.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–23

3 Remove the bolt (1), six places, attaching the


extension housing (2) to the transmission case.

4 Remove the extension housing and seal (3) from the


rear of the transmission case, discard the seal.

Figure 7C4 – 22

Take care not to scratch the machined seal


recess in the extension housing as
transmission fluid may weep past the outer
diameter of the installed seal.

5 If the extension housing rear bush is to be replaced,


remove the oil seal (1) from the extension housing (2),
using a suitable removing tool such as Tool No. E308
and discard the seal.

Figure 7C4 – 23

NOTE
Before removal, take note of the orientation of
the split in the bush to assist in the replacement
process.

6 If required, using the bush remover, Tool


No. J23062-14 (1) and driver handle, Tool
No. J8092 (2), press the bush (3) out of the extension
housing (4) and discard.

Figure 7C4 – 24
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–24

7 Lubricate the outside of a new bush with automatic


transmission fluid to reduce the chance of material
pick-up.

8 Ensure the split in the new bush (1) is in the same


orientation as noted previously and Install it into the
extension housing (2) using the installer tool, Tool
No. J34196-4 (3) and driver handle, Tool
No. J8092 (4).

Figure 7C4 – 25

Reinstall
Installation of the extension housing is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 If required, install a new oil seal in the extension housing, refer to 3.8 Extension Housing Oil Seal.

2 Lubricate a new seal with clean automatic transmission fluid and fit to the extension housing mounting flange.

3 Tighten the six bolts attaching the extension housing to the correct torque specification.

Extension housing attaching bolt


torque specification ................................. 42.0 – 48.0 Nm

3.10 Adaptor Housing, 4WD

Remove and Reinstall


For service operation of the transmission adaptor housing for 4WD vehicles, refer to 7D Transfer Case and Adaptor
Housing.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–25

3.11 Shift Solenoid Locations

Location and Identification

Legend

1 Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual


Valve Position Switch.

2 1 – 2 Shift Valve Solenoid A.

3 2 – 3 Shift Valve Solenoid B.

4 Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS).

5 Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated


(TCC PWM) Solenoid.

6 3 – 2 Control Solenoid.

Figure 7C4 – 26

To service the TCC PWM solenoid, refer to 3.13 Control Valve Body Harness.

3.12 1 – 2 Accumulator Assembly

Throughout this Section when using


compressed air and cleaning fluids, wear
safety glasses and gloves to avoid personal
injury.

Remove
1 Remove the oil pan and filter, refer to 3.1 Fluid Change and Filter Replacement.

2 Remove the two short bolts (1) and one long bolt (2)
attaching the accumulator cover (3) and remove the
cover.

3 Using low pressure compressed air applied to the


drilling in the cover, remove the 1 – 2 accumulator
piston and seal assembly (4) and the two
springs (5 and 6).

4 Remove the seal from the piston and discard the seal.

Figure 7C4 – 27
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–26

Clean and Inspect


1 Clean all components in a commercially available cleaning fluid and blow dry using compressed air.

2 Inspect the springs and ensure they are not distorted or broken, replace as required.

3 Inspect all machined surfaces for damage, wear or burrs.

Reinstall
Reinstallation of the 1 – 2 accumulator assembly is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 Lubricate a new seal with petroleum jelly and install it to the piston. Ensure the piston seal does not bind in the
piston groove.

2 Tighten the three bolts attaching the accumulator cover to the correct torque specification.

1 – 2 Accumulator cover attaching


bolt torque specification .....................................12.0 Nm

3.13 Control Valve Body Harness

Remove
1 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

2 As required, remove the oil pan and filter, refer to 3.1 Fluid Change and Filter Replacement.

3 Disconnect the control valve body harness connectors


from all electrical components except the torque
converter clutch (TCC) solenoid, which is hard wired.
Connectors identification:

• Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual


Valve Position Switch (1)

• 1 – 2 Shift Valve Solenoid A (2)

• 2 – 3 Shift Valve Solenoid B (3)

• Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) (4)

• Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated


(TCC PWM) Solenoid (5)

• 3 – 2 Control Solenoid (6).

Figure 7C4 – 28
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–27

To prevent personal injury, wear safety


glasses when removing the clip.

NOTE
Note the following when removing the solenoid:
• If required, rotate the solenoid until the flat
part of the clip becomes visible.
• The removal is only necessary to access the
TCC solenoid attaching bolts.

4 Using a hooked piece of wire or a small flat blade


screwdriver, remove the clip (1) retaining the
TCC PWM solenoid (2).

5 With a twisting and pulling motion remove the Figure 7C4 – 29


TCC PWM solenoid from the control valve body,
remove and discard the O-ring.

6 Remove the two bolts (1) attaching the TCC solenoid


assembly (2) to the control valve body.

Figure 7C4 – 30

7 Withdraw the TCC solenoid assembly (1) from the


control valve body (oil pump housing), remove and
discard the O-ring.

8 Lower the harness (2) and TCC solenoid, allow it to


hang from the pass-thru connector (3).

9 Remove the control valve body, refer to


3.14 Control Valve Body.

NOTE
This is necessary to provide clearance for the
pass-thru connector to be removed.

Figure 7C4 – 31
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–28

10 Lower the transmission to provide clearance between


the floor pan and the pass-thru connector located at
the right-hand rear of the transmission case.

11 Install the connector release, Tool No. 700-4208 (1)


over the pass-thru connector and use hand force to
push the tool down compressing the four retaining
tangs on the connector.

12 Pull the pass-thru connector free from the


transmission case and remove the control valve body
harness and TCC solenoid assembly from the
transmission.

13 Remove the O-ring from the pass-thru connector and


discard.

Figure 7C4 – 32

Reinstall
1 Lubricate a new O-ring with petroleum jelly and fit it to the pass-thru connector.

2 Reinstall the pass-thru connector up through the hole in the transmission case pushing it in until all four retaining
tangs have emerged on the outside of the transmission case. Gently pull on the connector to check if engagement
is secured.

3 Reinstall the control valve body, refer to 3.14 Control Valve Body.

4 Lubricate a new O-ring with petroleum jelly and fit it to


the TCC solenoid (2).

5 Reinstall the TCC solenoid assembly in the control


valve body , tighten the two attaching bolts (1) to the
correct torque specification.

TCC solenoid attaching bolt


torque specification ............................................12.0 Nm

Figure 7C4 – 33
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–29

6 Lubricate a new O-ring with petroleum jelly and fit it to


the TCC PWM solenoid (2).

7 Reinstall the TCC PWM solenoid in the control valve


body and secure it with the retaining clip (1).

Figure 7C4 – 34

8 Reconnect the control valve body harness connectors.


Connectors identification:

• Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual


Valve Position Switch (1)

• 1 – 2 Shift Valve Solenoid A (2)

• 2 – 3 Shift Valve Solenoid B (3)

• Pressure Control Solenoid (PCS) (4)

• Torque Converter Clutch Pulse Width Modulated


(TCC PWM) Solenoid (5)

• 3 – 2 Control Solenoid (6).

Figure 7C4 – 35

9 Secure the harness frame to the control valve body,


place the tab between the valve body and pressure
switch in location (1) and press the harness frame in
position on bolt bosses (2 and 3).

Figure 7C4 – 36

10 Reinstall the oil pan and filter and fill the transmission with the recommended automatic transmission fluid, refer to
3.1 Fluid Change and Filter Replacement.

11 Lower vehicle to the ground.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–30

12 Road test until the transmission has reached operating temperature. Re-check the fluid level and for any fluid leaks
from the oil pan area, refer to 2.1 Transmission Fluid.

3.14 Control Valve Body

Remove
1 Partially remove the control valve body harness until it hangs from the pass-thru connector, refer to
3.13 Control Valve Body Harness.

2 Remove the three long bolts (1) and the two short
bolts (2) attaching the transmission fluid pressure
(TFP) manual valve position switch assembly (3),
remove the switch and discard the shield (4).

3 Remove the attaching bolt (5) and the manual detent


spring (6).

Figure 7C4 – 37

In the following procedure support the


control valve body before removing the last
bolt.

NOTE
The removal may be more manageable by
removing the bolts in a spiral pattern starting
from the outside, removing the centre bolt last.

4 Remove the fourteen remaining bolts (1) attaching the


control valve body.

Figure 7C4 – 38
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–31

Keep the control valve body level when


lowering it to prevent the loss of the
checkballs located in the body passages.

5 Carefully lower the control valve body (1) from the


transmission case. As the valve body is being lowered,
rotate it slightly to disconnect the manual valve link (2)
from the manual valve (3) and remove the control
valve body.

6 Remove the manual valve link from the inner detent


lever (4).

Figure 7C4 – 39

Reinstall
Different bolt sizes are used to attach the control valve body and components, Figure 7C4 – 40 shows the location of the
attachment bolts with the letters referring to their dimensions.

NOTE
For clarity, the control valve body harness is not
shown in the illustration.

Figure 7C4 – 40

Legend
1 Control Valve Body A Bolt M6 x 1.00 x 65.0
2 Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Solenoid B Bolt M6 x 1.00 x 54.4
3 Transmission Fluid Pressure (TFP) Manual Valve Position C Bolt M6 x 1.00 x 47.5
Switch D Bolt M6 x 1.00 x 18.0
4 Manual Detent Spring E Bolt M6 x 1.00 x 35.0
5 1 – 2 Accumulator Cover F Bolt M6 x 1.25 x 20.0
G Bolt M6 x 1.00 x 12.0

1 Ensure the spacer plate gasket is in a satisfactory condition, replace as required, refer to 3.15 Spacer Plate, Check
Balls, Filter Screens and 3 – 4 Accumulator.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–32

2 If required, reinstall the seven checkballs (1) in the


control valve body securing them with petroleum jelly.

Figure 7C4 – 41

3 Reinstall the manual valve link (1) to the inner detent lever (2), refer to Figure 7C4 – 42.

4 While supporting the control valve body (3), rotate it slightly and connect the manual valve link with the manual
valve (4).

Take care not to damage the two filter screens


attached to the spacer plate during this
operation.

5 Position the manual valve forward to retain the link connection and carefully raise the valve body into position.

6 Check if the manual valve link is correctly reinstalled in the detent lever and manual valve.

Figure 7C4 – 42
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–33

When reinstalling the bolts throughout this


procedure, ensure to use the correct bolt
dimension in each location.

7 Reinstall one bolt (1) (M6 X 1.0 X 47.5) hand tight in


the centre of the control valve body to hold it in place,
at location C as shown.

Figure 7C4 – 43

8 Reinstall hand tight only, the remainder of the fourteen


bolts (1) attaching the control valve body directly.

NOTE
Refer to Figure 7C4 – 40 for each bolt dimension
and corresponding location.

Figure 7C4 – 44
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–34

9 Fit a new shield (1) to the transmission fluid pressure


(TFP) manual valve position switch (2) and reinstall to
the control valve body.

NOTE
Refer to Figure 7C4 – 40 for bolt dimension and
corresponding location.

10 Reinstall the three long bolts (3) and the two short
bolts (4) hand tight only.

11 Reinstall the manual detent spring (5) and the


attaching bolt (6) hand tight only.

Figure 7C4 – 45

The control valve body bolts must be


tightened in an outward spiral starting from
the centre. Failure to follow this pattern may
distort the valve body causing the valves to
jam in their bores.

12 Follow the sequence starting from the centre as shown


by the arrows to tighten the following bolts to the
correct torque specification:

• fourteen bolts (1) attaching the control valve


body,

• five bolts (2) attaching the transmission fluid


pressure (TFP) manual valve position switch and

• one bolt (3) attaching the manual detent spring.

Control valve body attaching bolt


torque specification ............................................12.0 Nm

Transmission fluid pressure (TFP)


manual valve position switch attaching
bolt torque specification .....................................12.0 Nm

Manual detent spring attaching bolt Figure 7C4 – 46


torque specification ............................................23.0 Nm

13 Reinstall the control valve body harness , refer to


3.13 Control Valve Body Harness.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–35

3.15 Spacer Plate, Check Balls, Filter Screens


and 3 – 4 Accumulator

Remove
1 Remove the control valve body, refer to 3.14 Control Valve Body.

2 Remove the three attaching bolts (1) and the plate (2)
supporting the spacer plate.

Figure 7C4 – 47

The 3 – 4 accumulator spring (1) may push


the spacer plate away from transmission
case when the 1 – 2 accumulator assembly is
removed.

3 While supporting the spacer plate (2), carefully remove


the 1 – 2 accumulator assembly (3), refer to
3.12 1 – 2 Accumulator Assembly.

As the spacer plate and gaskets are lowered


from the transmission, a check ball and the
3 – 4 accumulator spring may drop. Do not
lose the check ball and the spring.

4 Remove the two gaskets (4 and 5) and the spacer


plate from the transmission case.

Figure 7C4 – 48
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–36

5 If not previously dropped, remove the spring (1).


If required, use snap ring pliers to rotate and pull the
3 – 4 accumulator piston (2) to remove it from the
transmission case. Remove and discard the piston
seal.

Figure 7C4 – 49

6 Remove the check-ball (1) if not previously dropped.


Remove the 3rd accumulator check ball assembly (2),
the orifice cup plug (3) and the guide pins (A) from the
transmission case.

Figure 7C4 – 50

Clean and Inspect

To avoid personal injury, wear safety glasses


and gloves when using compressed air and
cleaning fluids.

1 Wash all components in a commercially available cleaning fluid and blow dry using compressed air.

2 Inspect the components for the following:

• piston for porosity,

• ring groove or pin hole damage,

• spring for distortion or damage,

• accumulator bore for wear or damage and

• spacer plate, filter screens and check balls for damage.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–37

Reinstall
1 Lubricate a new seal (1) with petroleum jelly and install
it to the 3 – 4 accumulator piston (2).

2 Reinstall the piston onto the pin (3). The piston side
with the three lugs (4) must face out of the bore.

3 Reinstall the 3 – 4 accumulator spring, use a small


amount of petroleum jelly to hold it in place, as
needed.

Figure 7C4 – 51

Ensure the guide pins are fully installed with


no thread visible. Otherwise the spacer plate
gasket could be caught in the thread during
installation, resulting in incorrect alignment.

4 Reinstall the guide pins (A) at the correct locations in


the transmission case.

5 Reinstall the check ball (1) in the transmission case


using a small amount of petroleum jelly to hold it in
place.

6 Reinstall the 3rd accumulator check ball assembly (2)


and the orifice cup plug (3) in the transmission case.

Figure 7C4 – 52
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–38

7 If a new spacer plate (1) is installed, it is necessary to


fit two filter screens (2 and 3) to the spacer plate.

Figure 7C4 – 53

NOTE
When installing the spacer plate locate the
gaskets as follows:
• The gasket (2) marked CA is fitted between
the spacer plate and the transmission case.
• The gasket (3) marked VB is fitted between
the spacer plate and the control valve body.

8 Reinstall the spacer plate (1) with the new


gaskets (2 and 3) smeared with petroleum jelly. Hold
the spacer plate in place until the 1 – 2 accumulator is
reinstalled.

9 While supporting the spacer plate, carefully reinstall


the 1 – 2 accumulator assembly (4), refer to
3.12 1 – 2 Accumulator Assembly.

Figure 7C4 – 54
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–39

10 Reinstall the plate (2) supporting the spacer plate and


tighten the three attaching bolts (1) to the correct
torque specification.

Spacer plate support plate attaching


bolt torque specification .....................................12.0 Nm

11 Reinstall the control valve body, refer to


3.14 Control Valve Body.

12 Reinstall the Oil pan and filter and fill the transmission
with the recommended automatic transmission fluid,
refer to 3.1 Fluid Change and Filter Replacement.

13 Lower vehicle to the ground.

14 Road test until the transmission has reached operating


temperature. Re-check the fluid level and for any fluid
leaks from the oil pan area, refer to 2.1 Transmission
Fluid.

Figure 7C4 – 55

3.16 Filler Tube and Breather Hose

Remove

NOTE
The breather hose and/or vent pipe can be
removed independently from the filler tube as
described in step 7.

Disconnection of the battery affects certain


vehicle electronic systems. Refer to 6D1-3
Battery, before disconnecting the battery.

1 Disconnect the battery ground lead.

2 Release the lock down lever (1) and remove the


transmission fluid level indicator from the filler tube (2).

Figure 7C4 – 56

3 Remove the bolt (1) attaching the filler tube (2) to the side of the right-hand cylinder head, refer to Figure 7C4 – 57.

4 Using a twisting and pulling motion, remove the filler tube from the seal (3) in the transmission case.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–40

5 Remove the filler tube from the engine compartment.

6 Remove the filler tube seal from the transmission case and discard.

7 If the breather hose needs to be replaced proceed as follows:

a unclip the breather hose (4) from the harness channel (5).

b Remove the transmission support and lower the rear of the transmission sufficiently to get access to the
breather hose, refer to 3.7 Transmission Support and Mount.

c Disconnect the breather hose from the T-joint (6) and the top of the transmission case and remove.

d If required, remove the two bolts (7) attaching the brackets of the vent pipe (8) to the chassis, disconnect from
the T-joint and remove the vent pipe.

Figure 7C4 – 57

Reinstall
Reinstallation of the transmission filler tube and/or the breather hose is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the
following:

1 Smear a new filler tube seal with clean transmission fluid and fit it to the transmission case.

2 Ensure the transmission breather hose and the harness are secured to the filler tube lower bracket.

3 Tighten the bolt attaching the filler tube bracket to the correct torque specification.

Filler tube bracket attaching bolt


torque specification ................................. 20.0 – 35.0 Nm

4 If required, tighten the two bolts attaching the vent pipe bracket to the chassis to the correct torque specification.

Vent pipe attaching bolt


torque specification ..............................................6.0 Nm
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–41

3.17 Transmission Cooler Line/Hose


Assemblies

Remove
1 Disconnect the transmission cooler hose/line
assemblies from the radiator quick connect fittings as
follows:

a Pull back the verifier disc (1) from the quick


connect fitting (2) and slide it back along the line.

b Open the release tool, Tool No J-41623-B (3),


slip it over the cooler line to be disconnected
from the radiator, ahead of the verifier disc.

c Slide the release tool along the cooler line and


engage it with the quick-connect fitting.

d While pushing inwards, rotate clockwise the


release tool about one sixth of a turn to release
the spring clip holding the cooler line.

e With the release tool held in this position, pull


back on the cooler line to release it.

f Plug the openings to prevent fluid loss and/or


contamination.

g Repeat the procedure to remove the remaining


cooler line.

NOTE
If the spring clip and/or O-ring seal in the quick-
connect fitting is damaged during the removal Figure 7C4 – 58
process, the complete fitting must be replaced.

2 Unclip the outlet cooler line (4) from the radiator fan
shroud (5).

3 Remove the screw (1) attaching the transmission


cooler line bracket (2) to the right-hand side of the
engine.

Figure 7C4 – 59

4 Remove the transmission support, refer to 3.7 Transmission Support and Mount.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–42

5 Carefully lower the rear of the transmission sufficiently to get access to the cooler lines.

6 Place a suitable sized drip tray underneath the transmission.

7 With the rear of the transmission lowered, disconnect


the cooler lines from the transmission, as follows:

a Pull back the verifier disc (1) to release it and


slide it back along the cooler line (2).

b Open the release tool, Tool No J-41623-B (3),


slip it over the cooler line to be disconnected
from the transmission, ahead of the verifier disc.

c Slide the release tool along the cooler line and


engage it with the quick-connect fitting (4).

d While pushing inwards, rotate clockwise the


release tool about one sixth of a turn to release
the spring clip holding the cooler line.

e With the release tool held in this position, pull


back on the cooler line to release it.

f Plug all openings to prevent fluid loss and/or


contamination.
Figure 7C4 – 60
g Repeat this process with the remaining cooler
line.

NOTE
If the spring clip and/or O-ring seal in the quick-
connect fitting is damaged during the removal
process, the complete fitting must be replaced.

8 Carefully remove the two cooler lines from the vehicle.

9 As required, separate the two cooler lines by removing the bracket and the two clips.

Reinstall
1 On the transmission end, ensure the spring clip and/or O-ring seal in each quick-connect fitting is not damaged,
replace the complete fitting if required.

2 If required, fit the bracket and the two clips to attach the transmission two cooler lines together.

3 Position the cooler lines in place, attach the cooler line bracket (2) with the screw (1) hand tight to the right-hand
side of the engine, refer to Figure 7C4 – 59.

4 Remove the plugs from the cooler lines and transmission fittings and wipe all exposed parts clean.

5 At the transmission end, smear the fluid lines rear fittings with clean automatic transmission fluid and push the
quick-connect fittings together.

If the verifier disc does not clip into place, the


quick-connect fitting is not engaged, rectify
as required.

6 As a security check, push and clip each verification disc into place over the quick-connect fittings. If difficulty is
experienced, repeat the installation process until the verification disc can be clipped into place over the
transmission quick-connect fitting.

7 Reinstall the transmission support, refer to 3.7 Transmission Support and Mount.

8 Remove the plugs from the cooler lines and radiator fittings and wipe all exposed parts clean.

9 At the radiator end, smear the fluid lines fittings with clean automatic transmission fluid and push the quick-connect
fittings together, refer to Figure 7C4 – 58.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–43

If the verifier disc does not clip into place, the


quick-connect fitting is not engaged, rectify
as required.

10 As a security check, push and clip each verification disc into place over the quick-connect fittings. If difficulty is
experienced, repeat the installation process until the verification disc can be clipped into place over the radiator
quick-connect fitting.

11 Snap the outlet cooler line (4) in the clip (5) of the radiator fan shroud.

12 Ensure the routeing of the cooler lines is correct and there is no fouling of the lines.

13 Tighten the screw attaching the cooler lines bracket to the correct torque specifications.

Transmission cooler lines bracket


attaching screw torque specification ..................23.0 Nm

14 If required, top up the transmission fluid level (cold).

15 Start the engine and check for any fluid leak at the fittings. If a leak is found, stop the engine and rectify the leak.

16 Check and top up the transmission fluid to the correct level as required, refer to 2.1 Transmission Fluid.

3.18 Transmission Assembly

Remove

Disconnection of the battery affects certain


vehicle electronic systems. Refer to 6D1-3
Battery, before disconnecting the battery.

1 Disconnect the battery ground lead.

2 Raise the vehicle and support in a safe manner, refer to 0A General Information for the location of support points.

3 Remove the heat shield from the neutral start and back-up lamp switch, gently prise the selector cable from the
transmission external manual shaft linkage and remove the selector cable from the bracket, refer to
3.3 Selector Cable Assembly.

4 Disconnect the harness connectors from the following:

a Vehicle speed sensor, refer to 3.5 Vehicle Speed Sensor.

b Neutral start and back-up switch, refer to 3.4 Neutral Start and Back-up Lamp Switch.

c For the following on four wheel drive vehicles (4WD), refer to 7D Transfer Case and Adaptor Housing:

• neutral switch,

• 2WD – 4WD shift actuator switch,

• speed sensor.

NOTE
If the battery is connected, avoid turning the
ignition switch to the ON position, as the transfer
case control module (TTCM) must first be
removed (memory to be cleared as Check 4WD
Indicator will light).

5 Remove the following components:

a Front and centre exhaust assemblies, refer to 6F Exhaust System.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–44

b Starter motor, refer to 6D1-2 Starting System.

b Rear propeller shaft and for 4WD front propeller shaft, refer to 4A Propeller Shaft.

6 On 4WD vehicle, disconnect the harness two clips from the upper side of the transfer case.

7 From within the starter motor access hole, remove the three bolts (2) attaching the torque converter to the flexplate
and discard, refer to Figure 7C4 – 62.

8 Remove the transmission support, refer to 3.7 Transmission Support and Mount.

9 Disconnect the fuel and EVAP pipes three brackets and clips, refer to 6C Fuel System – V6.

Before lowering the transmission take care of


the following:
• Do not strain the harness and connector
as the connector pins could be
permanently damaged.
• Ensure the inlet manifold does not hit the
firewall.

10 Carefully lower the transmission to provide enough


clearance to disconnect the harness connector (1).

Do not wiggle the connector from side to side


during removal as the connector pins could
be permanently damaged.

11 Disconnect the harness connector from the


transmission as follows:

a Roll back the dust boot to access the connector.

b Squeeze the widest side of the connector (A)


inward and pull it directly upward.

Figure 7C4 – 61

12 Remove the screws attaching the harness clips to the right-hand and left-hand sides of the transmission case, refer
to 12O Fuses, Relays and Wiring Harnesses.

13 Place a suitable sized drip tray underneath the transmission.

14 Remove the transmission cooler lines, refer to 3.17 Transmission Cooler Line/Hose Assemblies.

15 Disconnect the breather hose from the top of the transmission case.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–45

Support the transmission when removing the


attaching bolts to avoid damage to the torque
converter and flexplate. Do not have the
transmission hanging.

NOTE
The bolts attaching the torque converter housing
are facing forward except for the bolt in position ℑ
which is facing rearward.

16 With the transmission supported, using a long socket extension, universal joint and suitable size socket, remove
the bolt (1), nine places, attaching the torque converter housing to the engine, in the reverse order of the torque
sequence shown in within Figure 7C4 – 62.

The transmission assembly must not be


allowed to rest on its oil pan.

17 Support the transmission assembly on a suitable cradle and secure it. Place a suitable support under the engine oil
pan rail to support the engine after the transmission has been removed.

18 Remove the transmission assembly, disengaging the filler tube attached to the engine.

19 Remove the bolt (3) and torque converter cover (4) on the transmission right-hand side, remove the bolt (5) and
torque converter cover (6) on the transmission left-hand side.

20 Install a suitable holding tool to prevent the torque converter from becoming dislodged.

21 If required on 4WD vehicle, remove the transfer case, refer to 7D Transfer Case and Adaptor Housing.

Figure 7C4 – 62
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–46

Reinstall
1 If required on 4WD vehicle, reinstall the transfer case, refer to 7D Transfer Case and Adaptor Housing.

2 Ensure the transmission and the engine mating surfaces are clean and free of burrs.

3 Lubricate the torque converter spigot (7) with a small amount of high temperature wheel bearing grease, refer to
Figure 7C4 – 62.

4 Install a new filler tube seal into the transmission case.

Support the transmission while installing the


attaching bolts to avoid damage to the torque
converter and flexplate. Do not have the
transmission hanging.

5 Bring the transmission up to the engine, inserting the filler tube and ensuring the locating dowels completely enter
the torque converter housing.

6 Reconnect the breather hose to the top of the transmission case.

NOTE
The bolts attaching the torque converter housing
are facing forward except for the bolt in position ℑ
which is facing rearward.

7 With the transmission supported, install the bolt (1), nine places, attaching the torque converter housing to the
engine and tighten to the correct torque specification following the sequence shown in within Figure 7C4 – 62.

Torque converter housing attaching


bolt torque specification .......................... 52.0 – 66.0 Nm

8 Remove the access hole cover plate from the lower surface of the housing and push the torque converter forward
to meet the flexplate, then hand start three new bolts (2) before tightening to the correct torque specification.
Reinstall the access hole cover plate.

Torque converter to flexplate attaching


bolt torque specification .......................... 60.0 – 70.0 Nm

9 Reinstall the bolt (3) and torque converter cover (4) on the transmission right-hand side and the bolt (5) and torque
converter cover (6) on the transmission left-hand side, tighten the bolts to the correct torque specification.

Torque converter cover attaching


bolt torque specification .......................... 12.0 – 16.0 Nm

10 Reinstall the transmission fluid lines, refer to 3.17 Transmission Cooler Line/Hose Assemblies.

Prior to connecting the harness connector to


the transmission, check that all pins and
seals are in sound condition and the dust
boot is not torn or damaged.

11 Reconnect the transmission harness connector to the transmission as follows:

a Push straight down on the connector body until a click is heard.

b Reinstall the dust boot ensuring it is correctly located.

12 Attach the harness clips to the right-hand and left-hand sides of the transmission case, refer to 12O Fuses, Relays
and Wiring Harnesses.

13 On 4WD vehicle, connect the harness two clips from the upper side of the transfer case.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–47

14 Reconnect the fuel and EVAP pipes three brackets and clips, refer to 6C Fuel System – V6.

15 Reinstall the following components:

a Starter motor, refer to 6D1-2 Starting System.

b Transmission support, refer to 3.7Transmission Support and Mount.

c Front and centre exhaust assemblies, refer to 6F Exhaust System.

d Rear propeller shaft and for 4WD front propeller shaft, refer to 4A Propeller Shaft.

16 Reconnect the harness connectors to the following:

a Vehicle speed sensor, refer to 3.5 Vehicle Speed Sensor.

b Neutral start and back-up switch, refer to 3.4 Neutral Start and Back-up Lamp Switch.

c For the following on 4WD vehicles, refer to 7D Transfer Case and Adaptor Housing:

• neutral switch,

• 2WD – 4WD shift actuator switch,

• speed sensor.

17 Reinstall the selector cable to the transmission external manual shaft linkage, secure the selector cable to the
bracket and attach the heat shield to the neutral start and back-up lamp switch, refer to 3.3 Selector Cable
Assembly.

18 Perform a reverse flush of the cooler lines and a flow rate test, refer to 2.2 Reverse Flush and Flow Rate, if either
of the following applies:

• the transmission fluid is contaminated,

• the transmission has been replaced,

• the torque converter has been replaced, or

• the transmission oil pump has been replaced.

19 Lower the vehicle to the ground.

20 If required, top up the transmission fluid level (cold).

21 Reconnect the battery ground lead.

22 Start the engine and check for any fluid leaking at the fittings. If a leak is found, stop the engine and rectify the leak.

23 Road test until the transmission has reached operating temperature. Re-check the fluid level and for any fluid leaks,
refer to 2.1 Transmission Fluid.

3.19 Transmission Control Module

Remove
1 Ensure the ignition switch is in the OFF position.

2 Disconnect the connector (1) from the transmission control module (TCM) (2) as follows, refer to Figure 7C4 – 63:

a remove the securing pin (3),

b press the locking tab and swing the lever (4) to free the connector,

c remove the connector.

3 Remove the four bolts (5) and nuts (6), then the TCM from the mounting bracket (7).

4 If required, remove the two nuts (8) and the mounting bracket from the firewall.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–48

Figure 7C4 – 63

Reinstall
Reinstallation of the transmission control module (TCM) is the reverse of the removal procedure, noting the following:

1 If a new TCM is installed it must be programmed, refer to TCM Programming Procedure in this Section.

2 If required, install the mounting bracket to the firewall and tighten the nuts to the correct torque specification.

TCM bracket attaching


nut torque specification ........................................7.0 Nm

3 Install the TCM onto the bracket and tighten the bolts and nuts to the correct torque specification.

TCM attaching bolt and nut


torque specification ..............................................7.0 Nm

4 Lock the connector securely to the TCM by with the locking lever and the securing pin.

5 Using Tech 2, clear any TCM diagnostic trouble code (DTC) that may have set during the removal procedure, refer
to 0C Tech 2.

TCM Programming Procedure


1 The transmission control module (TCM) must be programmed with the correct software/calibration. Ensure the
following conditions exist before starting the TCM programming procedure:

a The battery is fully charged.

b The Tech 2 cable connection at the data link connector (DLC) is secure.

c The ignition switch is in the ON position.

2 Program the TCM using the latest software for the vehicle, refer to the following:

a Current release of TIS for the latest software and

b 0C Tech 2 for TCM service programming.


Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–49

3 If the TCM fails to program, proceed as follows:

a Ensure the TCM connection is secured.

b Ensure Tech 2 is programmed with the latest software version.

c Attempt to re-program the TCM. Replace the TCM if it still cannot be programmed properly.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–50

4 Specifications
For all 4L60E hydra-matic automatic transmission specifications, refer to 7C1 Automatic transmission – 4L60E – General
Information.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–51

5 Torque Wrench Specifications


For a complete listing of all torque wrench specifications for the 4L60E hydra-matic automatic transmission, refer to
7C1 Automatic transmission – 4L60E – General Information.
Automatic Transmission – 4L60E – On-vehicle Servicing Page 7C4–52

6 Special Tools
For a complete listing of all the special tools used for servicing the 4L60E hydra-matic automatic transmission, refer to
7C1 Automatic transmission – 4L60E – General Information.
TF4L6-WE-0871

You are requested to order this manual using the


manual number that is shown above.

This manual is applicable for vehicles in all countries


except the USA and Canada.

All rights reserved, This manual may not be


reproduced in whole or in part, without the permission
in writing of ISUZU MOTORS LIMITED.

Issued by
ISUZU MOTORS LIMITED
SERVICE MARKETING DEPARTMENT

Tokyo, Japan

First edition Aug. 2007 8708-01K


No. TF4L6-WE-0871

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen